Manufacturing engineering and technology - Schmid and Kalpakjian

57,065 views 201 slides Aug 14, 2014
Slide 1
Slide 1 of 823
Slide 1
1
Slide 2
2
Slide 3
3
Slide 4
4
Slide 5
5
Slide 6
6
Slide 7
7
Slide 8
8
Slide 9
9
Slide 10
10
Slide 11
11
Slide 12
12
Slide 13
13
Slide 14
14
Slide 15
15
Slide 16
16
Slide 17
17
Slide 18
18
Slide 19
19
Slide 20
20
Slide 21
21
Slide 22
22
Slide 23
23
Slide 24
24
Slide 25
25
Slide 26
26
Slide 27
27
Slide 28
28
Slide 29
29
Slide 30
30
Slide 31
31
Slide 32
32
Slide 33
33
Slide 34
34
Slide 35
35
Slide 36
36
Slide 37
37
Slide 38
38
Slide 39
39
Slide 40
40
Slide 41
41
Slide 42
42
Slide 43
43
Slide 44
44
Slide 45
45
Slide 46
46
Slide 47
47
Slide 48
48
Slide 49
49
Slide 50
50
Slide 51
51
Slide 52
52
Slide 53
53
Slide 54
54
Slide 55
55
Slide 56
56
Slide 57
57
Slide 58
58
Slide 59
59
Slide 60
60
Slide 61
61
Slide 62
62
Slide 63
63
Slide 64
64
Slide 65
65
Slide 66
66
Slide 67
67
Slide 68
68
Slide 69
69
Slide 70
70
Slide 71
71
Slide 72
72
Slide 73
73
Slide 74
74
Slide 75
75
Slide 76
76
Slide 77
77
Slide 78
78
Slide 79
79
Slide 80
80
Slide 81
81
Slide 82
82
Slide 83
83
Slide 84
84
Slide 85
85
Slide 86
86
Slide 87
87
Slide 88
88
Slide 89
89
Slide 90
90
Slide 91
91
Slide 92
92
Slide 93
93
Slide 94
94
Slide 95
95
Slide 96
96
Slide 97
97
Slide 98
98
Slide 99
99
Slide 100
100
Slide 101
101
Slide 102
102
Slide 103
103
Slide 104
104
Slide 105
105
Slide 106
106
Slide 107
107
Slide 108
108
Slide 109
109
Slide 110
110
Slide 111
111
Slide 112
112
Slide 113
113
Slide 114
114
Slide 115
115
Slide 116
116
Slide 117
117
Slide 118
118
Slide 119
119
Slide 120
120
Slide 121
121
Slide 122
122
Slide 123
123
Slide 124
124
Slide 125
125
Slide 126
126
Slide 127
127
Slide 128
128
Slide 129
129
Slide 130
130
Slide 131
131
Slide 132
132
Slide 133
133
Slide 134
134
Slide 135
135
Slide 136
136
Slide 137
137
Slide 138
138
Slide 139
139
Slide 140
140
Slide 141
141
Slide 142
142
Slide 143
143
Slide 144
144
Slide 145
145
Slide 146
146
Slide 147
147
Slide 148
148
Slide 149
149
Slide 150
150
Slide 151
151
Slide 152
152
Slide 153
153
Slide 154
154
Slide 155
155
Slide 156
156
Slide 157
157
Slide 158
158
Slide 159
159
Slide 160
160
Slide 161
161
Slide 162
162
Slide 163
163
Slide 164
164
Slide 165
165
Slide 166
166
Slide 167
167
Slide 168
168
Slide 169
169
Slide 170
170
Slide 171
171
Slide 172
172
Slide 173
173
Slide 174
174
Slide 175
175
Slide 176
176
Slide 177
177
Slide 178
178
Slide 179
179
Slide 180
180
Slide 181
181
Slide 182
182
Slide 183
183
Slide 184
184
Slide 185
185
Slide 186
186
Slide 187
187
Slide 188
188
Slide 189
189
Slide 190
190
Slide 191
191
Slide 192
192
Slide 193
193
Slide 194
194
Slide 195
195
Slide 196
196
Slide 197
197
Slide 198
198
Slide 199
199
Slide 200
200
Slide 201
201
Slide 202
202
Slide 203
203
Slide 204
204
Slide 205
205
Slide 206
206
Slide 207
207
Slide 208
208
Slide 209
209
Slide 210
210
Slide 211
211
Slide 212
212
Slide 213
213
Slide 214
214
Slide 215
215
Slide 216
216
Slide 217
217
Slide 218
218
Slide 219
219
Slide 220
220
Slide 221
221
Slide 222
222
Slide 223
223
Slide 224
224
Slide 225
225
Slide 226
226
Slide 227
227
Slide 228
228
Slide 229
229
Slide 230
230
Slide 231
231
Slide 232
232
Slide 233
233
Slide 234
234
Slide 235
235
Slide 236
236
Slide 237
237
Slide 238
238
Slide 239
239
Slide 240
240
Slide 241
241
Slide 242
242
Slide 243
243
Slide 244
244
Slide 245
245
Slide 246
246
Slide 247
247
Slide 248
248
Slide 249
249
Slide 250
250
Slide 251
251
Slide 252
252
Slide 253
253
Slide 254
254
Slide 255
255
Slide 256
256
Slide 257
257
Slide 258
258
Slide 259
259
Slide 260
260
Slide 261
261
Slide 262
262
Slide 263
263
Slide 264
264
Slide 265
265
Slide 266
266
Slide 267
267
Slide 268
268
Slide 269
269
Slide 270
270
Slide 271
271
Slide 272
272
Slide 273
273
Slide 274
274
Slide 275
275
Slide 276
276
Slide 277
277
Slide 278
278
Slide 279
279
Slide 280
280
Slide 281
281
Slide 282
282
Slide 283
283
Slide 284
284
Slide 285
285
Slide 286
286
Slide 287
287
Slide 288
288
Slide 289
289
Slide 290
290
Slide 291
291
Slide 292
292
Slide 293
293
Slide 294
294
Slide 295
295
Slide 296
296
Slide 297
297
Slide 298
298
Slide 299
299
Slide 300
300
Slide 301
301
Slide 302
302
Slide 303
303
Slide 304
304
Slide 305
305
Slide 306
306
Slide 307
307
Slide 308
308
Slide 309
309
Slide 310
310
Slide 311
311
Slide 312
312
Slide 313
313
Slide 314
314
Slide 315
315
Slide 316
316
Slide 317
317
Slide 318
318
Slide 319
319
Slide 320
320
Slide 321
321
Slide 322
322
Slide 323
323
Slide 324
324
Slide 325
325
Slide 326
326
Slide 327
327
Slide 328
328
Slide 329
329
Slide 330
330
Slide 331
331
Slide 332
332
Slide 333
333
Slide 334
334
Slide 335
335
Slide 336
336
Slide 337
337
Slide 338
338
Slide 339
339
Slide 340
340
Slide 341
341
Slide 342
342
Slide 343
343
Slide 344
344
Slide 345
345
Slide 346
346
Slide 347
347
Slide 348
348
Slide 349
349
Slide 350
350
Slide 351
351
Slide 352
352
Slide 353
353
Slide 354
354
Slide 355
355
Slide 356
356
Slide 357
357
Slide 358
358
Slide 359
359
Slide 360
360
Slide 361
361
Slide 362
362
Slide 363
363
Slide 364
364
Slide 365
365
Slide 366
366
Slide 367
367
Slide 368
368
Slide 369
369
Slide 370
370
Slide 371
371
Slide 372
372
Slide 373
373
Slide 374
374
Slide 375
375
Slide 376
376
Slide 377
377
Slide 378
378
Slide 379
379
Slide 380
380
Slide 381
381
Slide 382
382
Slide 383
383
Slide 384
384
Slide 385
385
Slide 386
386
Slide 387
387
Slide 388
388
Slide 389
389
Slide 390
390
Slide 391
391
Slide 392
392
Slide 393
393
Slide 394
394
Slide 395
395
Slide 396
396
Slide 397
397
Slide 398
398
Slide 399
399
Slide 400
400
Slide 401
401
Slide 402
402
Slide 403
403
Slide 404
404
Slide 405
405
Slide 406
406
Slide 407
407
Slide 408
408
Slide 409
409
Slide 410
410
Slide 411
411
Slide 412
412
Slide 413
413
Slide 414
414
Slide 415
415
Slide 416
416
Slide 417
417
Slide 418
418
Slide 419
419
Slide 420
420
Slide 421
421
Slide 422
422
Slide 423
423
Slide 424
424
Slide 425
425
Slide 426
426
Slide 427
427
Slide 428
428
Slide 429
429
Slide 430
430
Slide 431
431
Slide 432
432
Slide 433
433
Slide 434
434
Slide 435
435
Slide 436
436
Slide 437
437
Slide 438
438
Slide 439
439
Slide 440
440
Slide 441
441
Slide 442
442
Slide 443
443
Slide 444
444
Slide 445
445
Slide 446
446
Slide 447
447
Slide 448
448
Slide 449
449
Slide 450
450
Slide 451
451
Slide 452
452
Slide 453
453
Slide 454
454
Slide 455
455
Slide 456
456
Slide 457
457
Slide 458
458
Slide 459
459
Slide 460
460
Slide 461
461
Slide 462
462
Slide 463
463
Slide 464
464
Slide 465
465
Slide 466
466
Slide 467
467
Slide 468
468
Slide 469
469
Slide 470
470
Slide 471
471
Slide 472
472
Slide 473
473
Slide 474
474
Slide 475
475
Slide 476
476
Slide 477
477
Slide 478
478
Slide 479
479
Slide 480
480
Slide 481
481
Slide 482
482
Slide 483
483
Slide 484
484
Slide 485
485
Slide 486
486
Slide 487
487
Slide 488
488
Slide 489
489
Slide 490
490
Slide 491
491
Slide 492
492
Slide 493
493
Slide 494
494
Slide 495
495
Slide 496
496
Slide 497
497
Slide 498
498
Slide 499
499
Slide 500
500
Slide 501
501
Slide 502
502
Slide 503
503
Slide 504
504
Slide 505
505
Slide 506
506
Slide 507
507
Slide 508
508
Slide 509
509
Slide 510
510
Slide 511
511
Slide 512
512
Slide 513
513
Slide 514
514
Slide 515
515
Slide 516
516
Slide 517
517
Slide 518
518
Slide 519
519
Slide 520
520
Slide 521
521
Slide 522
522
Slide 523
523
Slide 524
524
Slide 525
525
Slide 526
526
Slide 527
527
Slide 528
528
Slide 529
529
Slide 530
530
Slide 531
531
Slide 532
532
Slide 533
533
Slide 534
534
Slide 535
535
Slide 536
536
Slide 537
537
Slide 538
538
Slide 539
539
Slide 540
540
Slide 541
541
Slide 542
542
Slide 543
543
Slide 544
544
Slide 545
545
Slide 546
546
Slide 547
547
Slide 548
548
Slide 549
549
Slide 550
550
Slide 551
551
Slide 552
552
Slide 553
553
Slide 554
554
Slide 555
555
Slide 556
556
Slide 557
557
Slide 558
558
Slide 559
559
Slide 560
560
Slide 561
561
Slide 562
562
Slide 563
563
Slide 564
564
Slide 565
565
Slide 566
566
Slide 567
567
Slide 568
568
Slide 569
569
Slide 570
570
Slide 571
571
Slide 572
572
Slide 573
573
Slide 574
574
Slide 575
575
Slide 576
576
Slide 577
577
Slide 578
578
Slide 579
579
Slide 580
580
Slide 581
581
Slide 582
582
Slide 583
583
Slide 584
584
Slide 585
585
Slide 586
586
Slide 587
587
Slide 588
588
Slide 589
589
Slide 590
590
Slide 591
591
Slide 592
592
Slide 593
593
Slide 594
594
Slide 595
595
Slide 596
596
Slide 597
597
Slide 598
598
Slide 599
599
Slide 600
600
Slide 601
601
Slide 602
602
Slide 603
603
Slide 604
604
Slide 605
605
Slide 606
606
Slide 607
607
Slide 608
608
Slide 609
609
Slide 610
610
Slide 611
611
Slide 612
612
Slide 613
613
Slide 614
614
Slide 615
615
Slide 616
616
Slide 617
617
Slide 618
618
Slide 619
619
Slide 620
620
Slide 621
621
Slide 622
622
Slide 623
623
Slide 624
624
Slide 625
625
Slide 626
626
Slide 627
627
Slide 628
628
Slide 629
629
Slide 630
630
Slide 631
631
Slide 632
632
Slide 633
633
Slide 634
634
Slide 635
635
Slide 636
636
Slide 637
637
Slide 638
638
Slide 639
639
Slide 640
640
Slide 641
641
Slide 642
642
Slide 643
643
Slide 644
644
Slide 645
645
Slide 646
646
Slide 647
647
Slide 648
648
Slide 649
649
Slide 650
650
Slide 651
651
Slide 652
652
Slide 653
653
Slide 654
654
Slide 655
655
Slide 656
656
Slide 657
657
Slide 658
658
Slide 659
659
Slide 660
660
Slide 661
661
Slide 662
662
Slide 663
663
Slide 664
664
Slide 665
665
Slide 666
666
Slide 667
667
Slide 668
668
Slide 669
669
Slide 670
670
Slide 671
671
Slide 672
672
Slide 673
673
Slide 674
674
Slide 675
675
Slide 676
676
Slide 677
677
Slide 678
678
Slide 679
679
Slide 680
680
Slide 681
681
Slide 682
682
Slide 683
683
Slide 684
684
Slide 685
685
Slide 686
686
Slide 687
687
Slide 688
688
Slide 689
689
Slide 690
690
Slide 691
691
Slide 692
692
Slide 693
693
Slide 694
694
Slide 695
695
Slide 696
696
Slide 697
697
Slide 698
698
Slide 699
699
Slide 700
700
Slide 701
701
Slide 702
702
Slide 703
703
Slide 704
704
Slide 705
705
Slide 706
706
Slide 707
707
Slide 708
708
Slide 709
709
Slide 710
710
Slide 711
711
Slide 712
712
Slide 713
713
Slide 714
714
Slide 715
715
Slide 716
716
Slide 717
717
Slide 718
718
Slide 719
719
Slide 720
720
Slide 721
721
Slide 722
722
Slide 723
723
Slide 724
724
Slide 725
725
Slide 726
726
Slide 727
727
Slide 728
728
Slide 729
729
Slide 730
730
Slide 731
731
Slide 732
732
Slide 733
733
Slide 734
734
Slide 735
735
Slide 736
736
Slide 737
737
Slide 738
738
Slide 739
739
Slide 740
740
Slide 741
741
Slide 742
742
Slide 743
743
Slide 744
744
Slide 745
745
Slide 746
746
Slide 747
747
Slide 748
748
Slide 749
749
Slide 750
750
Slide 751
751
Slide 752
752
Slide 753
753
Slide 754
754
Slide 755
755
Slide 756
756
Slide 757
757
Slide 758
758
Slide 759
759
Slide 760
760
Slide 761
761
Slide 762
762
Slide 763
763
Slide 764
764
Slide 765
765
Slide 766
766
Slide 767
767
Slide 768
768
Slide 769
769
Slide 770
770
Slide 771
771
Slide 772
772
Slide 773
773
Slide 774
774
Slide 775
775
Slide 776
776
Slide 777
777
Slide 778
778
Slide 779
779
Slide 780
780
Slide 781
781
Slide 782
782
Slide 783
783
Slide 784
784
Slide 785
785
Slide 786
786
Slide 787
787
Slide 788
788
Slide 789
789
Slide 790
790
Slide 791
791
Slide 792
792
Slide 793
793
Slide 794
794
Slide 795
795
Slide 796
796
Slide 797
797
Slide 798
798
Slide 799
799
Slide 800
800
Slide 801
801
Slide 802
802
Slide 803
803
Slide 804
804
Slide 805
805
Slide 806
806
Slide 807
807
Slide 808
808
Slide 809
809
Slide 810
810
Slide 811
811
Slide 812
812
Slide 813
813
Slide 814
814
Slide 815
815
Slide 816
816
Slide 817
817
Slide 818
818
Slide 819
819
Slide 820
820
Slide 821
821
Slide 822
822
Slide 823
823

About This Presentation

Manufacturing engineering and technology - Schmid and Kalpakjian


Slide Content

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall Page 1-1
CHAPTER 1
The Structure of Metals

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall Page 1-2
Chapter 1 Outline
Figure 1.1 An outline of the topics described in Chapter 1

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall Page 1-3
Body-Centered Cubic Crystal Structure
Figure 1.2 The body-centered cubic (bcc) crystal structure: (a) hard-ball model; (b) unit cell; and (c) single
crystal with many unit cells. Source: W. G. Moffatt, et al., The Structure and Properties of Materials, Vol. 1,
John Wiley & Sons, 1976.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall Page 1-4
Face-Centered Cubic Crystal Structure
Figure 1.3 The face-centered cubic (fcc) crystal structure: (a) hard-ball model; (b) unit cell; and (c) single
crystal with many unit cells. Source: W. G. Moffatt, et al., The Structure and Properties of Materials, Vol. 1,
John Wiley & Sons, 1976.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall Page 1-5
Hexagonal Close-Packed Crystal Structure
Figure 1.4 The hexagonal close-
packed (hcp) crystal structure:
(a) unit cell; and (b) single
crystal with many unit cells.
Source: W. G. Moffatt, et al., The
Structure and Properties of
Materials, Vol. 1, John Wiley &
Sons, 1976.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall Page 1-6
Slip and Twinning
Figure 1.5 Permanent deformation (also
called plastic deformation) of a single
crystal subjected to a shear stress: (a)
structure before deformation; and (b)
permanent deformation by slip. The size
of the b/a ratio influences the magnitude
of the shear stress required to cause slip.
Figure 1.6 (a) Permanent deformation of a single
crystal under a tensile load. Note that the slip planes
tend to align themselves in the direction of the pulling
force. This behavior can be simulated using a deck of
cards with a rubber band around them. (b) Twinning
in a single crystal in tension.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall Page 1-7
Slip Lines and Slip Bands
Figure 1.7 Schematic illustration of slip lines
and slip bands in a single crystal (grain)
subjected to a shear stress. A slip band consists
of a number of slip planes. The crystal at the
center of the upper illustration is an individual
grain surrounded by other grains.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall Page 1-8
Edge and Screw Dislocations
Figure 1.8 Types of dislocations in a single crystal: (a) edge dislocation; and (b) screw dislocation.
Source: (a) After Guy and Hren, Elements of Physical Metallurgy, 1974. (b) L. Van Vlack, Materials for
Engineering, 4th ed., 1980.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall Page 1-9
Defects in a Single-Crystal Lattice
Figure 1.9 Schematic illustration of types of defects in a single-crystal lattice: self-
interstitial, vacancy, interstitial, and substitutional.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall Page 1-10
Movement of an Edge Dislocation
Figure 1.10 Movement of an edge dislocation across the crystal lattice under a shear stress.
Dislocations help explain why the actual strength of metals in much lower than that predicted by
theory.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall Page 1-11
Solidification
Figure 1.11 Schematic
illustration of the stages
during solidification of
molten metal; each small
square represents a unit cell.
(a) Nucleation of crystals at
random sites in the molten
metal; note that the
crystallographic orientation
of each site is different. (b)
and (c) Growth of crystals as
solidification continues. (d)
Solidified metal, showing
individual grains and grain
boundaries; note the different
angles at which neighboring
grains meet each other.
Source: W. Rosenhain.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall Page 1-12
Grain Sizes
TABLE 1.1
ASTM No. Grains/mm
2
Grains/mm
3
–3
–2
–1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
4
8
16
32
64
128
256
512
1,024
2,048
4,096
8,200
16,400
32,800
0.7
2
5.6
16
45
128
360
1,020
2,900
8,200
23,000
65,000
185,000
520,000
1,500,000
4,200,000

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall Page 1-13
Preferred Orientation
Figure 1.12 Plastic deformation of
idealized (equiaxed) grains in a
specimen subjected to compression
(such as occurs in the rolling or forging
of metals): (a) before deformation; and
(b) after deformation. Note hte
alignment of grain boundaries along a
horizontal direction; this effect is
known as preferred orientation.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall Page 1-14
Anisotropy
Figure 1.13 (a) Schematic illustration of a crack in sheet metal that has been subjected to bulging
(caused by, for example, pushing a steel ball against the sheet). Note the orientation of the crack with
respect to the rolling direction of the sheet; this sheet is anisotropic. (b) Aluminum sheet with a crack
(vertical dark line at the center) developed in a bulge test; the rolling direction of the sheet was vertical.
Source: J.S. Kallend, Illinois Institute of Technology.
(b)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall Page 1-15
Annealing
Figure 1.14 Schematic illustration of the
effects of recovery, recrystallization, and
grain growth on mechanical properties
and on the shape and size of grains. Note
the formation of small new grains during
recrystallization. Source: G. Sachs.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall Page 1-16
Homologous Temperature Ranges for Various
Processes
TABLE 1.2
Process T/T
m
Cold working
Warm working
Hot working
< 0.3
0.3 to 0.5
> 0.6

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-1
CHAPTER 2
Mechanical Behavior, Testing, and
Manufacturing Properties of Materials

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-2
Relative Mechanical Properties of Materials at
Room Temperature
TABLE 2.1
Strength Hardness Toughness Stiffness Strength/Density
Glass fibers
Graphite fibers
Kevlar fibers
Carbides
Molybdenum
Steels
Tantalum
Titanium
Copper
Reinforced
Reinforced
Thermoplastics
Lead
Diamond
Cubic boron nitride
Carbides
Hardened steels
Titanium
Cast irons
Copper
Thermosets
Magnesium
thermosets
thermoplastics
Lead
Rubbers
Ductile metals
Reinforced plastics
Thermoplastics
Wood
Thermosets
Ceramics
Glass
Ceramics
Reinforced
Thermoplastics
Tin
Thermoplastics
Diamond
Carbides
Tungsten
Steel
Copper
Titanium
Aluminum
Tantalum
plastics
Wood
Thermosets
Reinforced plastics
Titanium
Steel
Aluminum
Magnesium
Beryllium
Copper

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-3
Tensile-Test Specimen and Machine
(b)
Figure 2.1 (a) A standard tensile-test specimen before and after pulling, showing original and final
gage lengths. (b) A typical tensile-testing machine.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-4
Stress-Strain Curve
Figure 2.2 A typical stress-
strain curve obtained from a
tension test, showing various
features.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-5
Mechanical Properties of Various Materials at
Room Temperature
TABLE 2.2 Mechanical Properties of Various Materials at Room TemperatureMetals (Wrought) E (GPa) Y (MPa) UTS (MPa)
Elongation
in 50 mm
(%)
Aluminum and its alloys
Copper and its alloys
Lead and its alloys
Magnesium and its alloys
Molybdenum and its alloys
Nickel and its alloys
Steels
Titanium and its alloys
Tungsten and its alloys
69–79
105–150
14
41–45
330–360
180–214
190–200
80–130
350–400
35–550
76–1100
14
130–305
80–2070
105–1200
205–1725
344–1380
550–690
90–600
140–1310
20–55
240–380
90–2340
345–1450
415–1750
415–1450
620–760
45–4
65–3
50–9
21–5
40–30
60–5
65–2
25–7
0
Nonmetallic materialsCeramics Diamond Glass and porcelain Rubbers Thermoplastics Thermoplastics, reinforced Thermosets
Boron fibers
Carbon fibers
Glass fibers
Kevlar fibers
70–1000
820–1050
70-80
0.01–0.1
1.4–3.4
2–50
3.5–17
380
275–415
73–85
62–117











140–2600

140

7–80
20–120
35–170
3500
2000–3000
3500–4600
2800
0



1000–5
10–1
0
0
0
0
0
Note: In the upper table the lowest values for E, Y, and UTS and the highest values for elongation are for pure metals.
Multiply gigapascals (GPa) by 145,000 to obtain pounds per square in. (psi), megapascals (MPa) by 145 to obtain psi.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-6
Loading and Unloading of Tensile-Test
Specimen
Figure 2.3 Schematic illustration of the
loading and the unloading of a tensile- test
specimen. Note that, during unloading,
the curve follows a path parallel to the
original elastic slope.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-7
Elongation versus % Area Reduction
Figure 2.4
Approximate
relationship
between elongation
and tensile
reduction of area
for various groups
of metals.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-8
Construction of True Stress-True Strain Curve
Figure 2.5 (a) Load-elongation
curve in tension testing of a
stainless steel specimen. (b)
Engineering stress-engineering
strain curve, drawn from the data
in Fig. 2.5a. (c) True stress-true
strain curve, drawn from the data
in Fig. 2.5b. Note that this curve
has a positive slope, indicating
that the material is becoming
stronger as it is strained. (d) True
stress-true strain curve plotted on
log-log paper and based on the
corrected curve in Fig. 2.5c. The
correction is due to the triaxial
state of stress that exists in the
necked region of a specimen.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-9
Typical Values for K and n at Room
TemperatureTABLE 2.3
K (MPa) n
Aluminum
1100–O
2024–T4
6061–O
6061–T6
7075–O
Brass
70–30, annealed
85–15, cold-rolled
Cobalt-base alloy, heat-treated
Copper, annealed
Steel
Low-C annealed
4135 annealed
4135 cold-rolled
4340 annealed
304 stainless, annealed
410 stainless, annealed
180
690
205
410
400
900
580
2070
315
530
1015
1100
640
1275
960
0.20
0.16
0.20
0.05
0.17
0.49
0.34
0.50
0.54
0.26
0.17
0.14
0.15
0.45
0.10

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-10
True Stress-True Strain Curves
Figure 2.6 True stress-true
strain curves in tension at
room temperature for
various metals. The curves
start at a finite level of
stress: The elastic regions
have too steep a slope to be
shown in this figure, and so
each curve starts at the
yield stress, Y, of the
material.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-11
Temperature Effects on Stress-Strain Curves
Figure 2.7 Typical effects of temperature
on stress-strain curves. Note that
temperature affects the modulus of
elasticity, the yield stress, the ultimate
tensile strength, and the toughness (area
under the curve) of materials.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-12
Typical Ranges of Strain and Deformation Rate in
Manufacturing Processes
TABLE 2.4Process True strain
Deformation rate
(m/s)
Cold working
Forging, rolling
Wire and tube drawing
Explosive forming
Hot working and warm working
Forging, rolling
Extrusion
Machining
Sheet-metal forming
Superplastic forming
0.1–0.5
0.05–0.5
0.05–0.2
0.1–0.5
2–5
1–10
0.1–0.5
0.2–3
0.1–100
0.1–100
10–100
0.1–30
0.1–1
0.1–100
0.05–2
10
-4
-10
-2

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-13
Effect of Strain Rate on Ultimate Tensile
Strength
Figure 2.8 The effect of strain
rate on the ultimate tensile
strength for aluminum. Note
that, as the temperature
increases, the slopes of the
curves increase; thus, strength
becomes more and more
sensitive to strain rate as
temperature increases. Source:
J. H. Hollomon.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-14
Disk and Torsion-Test Specimens
Figure 2.9 Disk test on a brittle
material, showing the direction
of loading and the fracture path.
Figure 2.10 Typical torsion-test specimen; it is mounted between the two heads of a testing machine and
twisted. Note the shear deformation of
an element in the reduced section of
the specimen.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-15
Bending
Figure 2.11 Two bend-test
methods for brittle materials: (a)
three-point bending; (b) four-
point bending. The areas on the
beams represent the bending-
moment diagrams, described in
texts on mechanics of solids.
Note the region of constant
maximum bending moment in
(b); by contrast, the maximum
bending moment occurs only at
the center of the specimen in
(a).

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-16
Hardness Tests
Figure 2.12 General
characteristics of
hardness-testing
methods and formulas
for calculating
hardness. The quantity
P is the load applied.
Source: H. W. Hayden,
et al., The Structure
and Properties of
Materials, Vol. III
(John Wiley & Sons,
1965).

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-17
Brinell Testing
(c)
Figure 2.13 Indentation geometry in
Brinell testing; (a) annealed metal; (b)
work-hardened metal; (c) deformation of
mild steel under a spherical indenter.
Note that the depth of the permanently
deformed zone is about one order of
magnitude larger than the depth of
indentation. For a hardness test to be
valid, this zone should be fully
developed in the material. Source: M. C.
Shaw and C. T. Yang.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-18
Hardness
Conversion
Chart
Figure 2.14 Chart
for converting
various hardness
scales. Note the
limited range of
most scales.
Because of the
many factors
involved, these
conversions are
approximate.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-19
S-N Curves
Figure 2.15 Typical S-N
curves for two metals. Note
that, unlike steel, aluminum
does not have an endurance
limit.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-20
Endurance Limit/Tensile Strength versus
Tensile Strength
Figure 2.16 Ratio of endurance limit to
tensile strength for various metals, as a
function of tensile strength. Because
aluminum does not have an endurance limit,
the correlation for aluminum are based on a
specific number of cycles, as is seen in Fig.
2.15.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-21
Creep Curve
Figure 2.17 Schematic
illustration of a typical creep
curve. The linear segment of
the curve (secondary) is used
in designing components for a
specific creep life.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-22
Impact Test Specimens
Figure 2.18 Impact test
specimens: (a) Charpy;
(b) Izod.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-23
Failures of Materials and Fractures in
Tension
Figure 2.19 Schematic illustration
of types of failures in materials: (a)
necking and fracture of ductile
materials; (b) Buckling of ductile
materials under a compressive load;
(c) fracture of brittle materials in
compression; (d) cracking on the
barreled surface of ductile materials
in compression.
Figure 2.20 Schematic illustration of the types of
fracture in tension: (a) brittle fracture in polycrystalline
metals; (b) shear fracture in ductile single crystals--see
also Fig. 1.6a; (c) ductile cup-and-cone fracture in
polycrystalline metals; (d) complete ductile fracture in
polycrystalline metals, with 100% reduction of area.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-24
Ductile Fracture
Figure 2.21 Surface of ductile
fracture in low-carbon steel,
showing dimples. Fracture is
usually initiated at impurities,
inclusions, or preexisting voids
(microporosity) in the metal.
Source: K.-H. Habig and D.
Klaffke. Photo by BAM
Berlin/Germany.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-25
Fracture of a Tensile-Test Specimen
Figure 2.22 Sequence of events in necking and fracture of a tensile-test specimen: (a) early stage of
necking; (b) small voids begin to form within the necked region; (c) voids coalesce, producing an
internal crack; (d) the rest of the cross-section begins to fail at the periphery, by shearing; (e) the final
fracture surfaces, known as cup- (top fracture surface) and cone- (bottom surface) fracture.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-26
Deformation of Soft and Hard Inclusions
Figure 2.23 Schematic illustration of the deformation of soft and hard inclusions and of their effect on void
formation in plastic deformation. Note that, because they do not comply with the overall deformation of the
ductile matrix, hard inclusions can cause internal voids.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-27
Transition Temperature
Figure 2.24 Schematic
illustration of transition
temperature in metals.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-28
Brittle Fracture Surface
Figure 2.25 Fracture
surface of steel that has
failed in a brittle manner.
The fracture path is
transgranular (through the
grains). Magnification:
200X. Source: Courtesy
of B. J. Schulze and S. L.
Meiley and Packer
Engineering Associates,
Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-29
Intergranular Fracture
Figure 2.26 Intergranular
fracture, at two different
magnifications. Grains
and grain boundaries are
clearly visible in this
micrograph. Te fracture
path is along the grain
boundaries.
Magnification: left, 100X;
right, 500X. Source:
Courtesy of B. J. Schulze
and S. L. Meiley and
Packer Engineering
Associates, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-30
Fatigue-Fracture Surface
Figure 2.27 Typical
fatigue-fracture surface on
metals, showing beach
marks. Magnification:
left, 500X; right, 1000X.
Source: Courtesy of B. J.
Schulze and S. L. Meiley
and Packer Engineering
Associates, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-31
Reduction in Fatigue Strength
Figure 2.28 Reductions in the
fatigue strength of cast steels
subjected to various surface-
finishing operations. Note that the
reduction becomes greater as the
surface roughness and the strength
of the steel increase. Source: M.
R. Mitchell.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-32
Residual Stresses
Figure 2.29 Residual stresses developed in bending a beam having a rectangular cross-section. Note that the
horizontal forces and moments caused by residual stresses in the beam must be balanced internally. Because of
nonuniform deformation during metalworking operations, most parts develop residual stresses.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 2-33
Distortion of Parts with Residual Stresses
Figure 2.30 Distortion of parts, with residual stresses, after cutting or slitting: (a) flat
sheet or plate; (b) solid round rod; (c) think-walled tubing or pipe.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 3-1
CHAPTER 3
Physical Properties of Materials

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 3-2
Physical Properties of Selected Materials at
Room Temperature
TABLE 3.1 Physical Properties of Selected Materials at Room TemperatureMetal Density
(kg/m
3)
Melting Point
(°C)
Specific heat
(J/kg K)
Thermal conductivity
(W/m K)
Aluminum
Aluminum alloys
Beryllium
Columbium (niobium)
Copper
Copper alloys
Iron
Steels
Lead
Lead alloys
Magnesium
Magnesium alloys
Molybdenum alloys
Nickel
Nickel alloys
Tantalum alloys
Titanium
Titanium alloys
Tungsten
Zinc
Zinc alloys
2700
2630–2820
1854
8580
8970
7470–8940
7860
6920–9130
11,350
8850–11,350
1745
1770–1780
10,210
8910
7750–8850
16,600
4510
4430–4700
19,290
7140
6640–7200
660
476–654
1278
2468
1082
885–1260
1537
1371–1532
327
182–326
650
610–621
2610
1453
1110–1454
2996
1668
1549–1649
3410
419
386–525
900
880–920
1884
272
385
377–435
460
448–502
130
126–188
1025
1046
276
440
381–544
142
519
502–544
138
385
402
222
121–239
146
52
393
29–234
74
15–52
35
24–46
154
75–138
142
92
12–63
54
17
8–12
166
113
105–113
NonmetallicCeramics
Glasses
Graphite
Plastics
Wood
2300–5500
2400–2700
1900–2200
900–2000
400–700

580–1540

110–330

750–950
500–850
840
1000–2000
2400–2800
10–17
0.6–1.7
5–10
0.1–0.4
0.1–0.4

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 3-3
Physical Properties of Material
TABLE 3.2 Physical Properties of Materials, in Descending OrderDensity Melting point Specific heat Thermal
conductivity
Thermal
expansion
Electrical
conductivity
Platinum
Gold
Tungsten
Tantalum
Lead
Silver
Molybdenum
Copper
Steel
Titanium
Aluminum
Beryllium
Glass
Magnesium
Plastics
Tungsten
Tantalum
Molybdenum
Columbium
Titanium
Iron
Beryllium
Copper
Gold
Silver
Aluminum
Magnesium
Lead
Tin
Plastics
Wood
Beryllium
Porcelain
Aluminum
Graphite
Glass
Titanium
Iron
Copper
Molybdenum
Tungsten
Lead
Silver
Copper
Gold
Aluminum
Magnesium
Graphite
Tungsten
Beryllium
Zinc
Steel
Tantalum
Ceramics
Titanium
Glass
Plastics
Plastics
Lead
Tin
Magnesium
Aluminum
Copper
Steel
Gold
Ceramics
Glass
Tungsten
Silver
Copper
Gold
Aluminum
Magnesium
Tungsten
Beryllium
Steel
Tin
Graphite
Ceramics
Glass
Plastics
Quartz

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 3-4
Specific
Strength and
Specific
Stiffness
Figure 3.1 Specific
strength (tensile
strength/density) and
specific stiffness (elastic
modulus/density) for
various materials at
room temperature. (See
also Chapter 9.) Source:
M.J. Salkind.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 3-5
Specific Strength versus Temperature
Figure 3.2 Specific strength (tensile strength/density) for a variety of materials as a
function of temperature. Note the useful temperature range for these materials and the
high values for composite materials.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-1
CHAPTER 4
Metal Alloys: Their Structure and
Strengthening by Heat Treatment

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-2
Induction-Hardened Surface
Figure 4.1 Cross-section of
gear teeth showing
induction-hardened
surfaces. Source: TOCCO
Div., Park-Ohio Industries,
Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-3
Chapter 4 Outline
Figure 4.2 Outline of topics described in Chapter 4.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-4
Two-Phase System
Figure 4.3 (a) Schematic illustration of grains, grain boundaries, and particles dispersed throughout
the structure of a two-phase system, such as a lead-copper alloy. The grains represent lead in solid
solution in copper, and the particles are lead as a second phase. (b) Schematic illustration of a two-
phase system consisting of two sets of grains: dark, and light. The dark and the light grains have
separate compositions and properties.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-5
Cooling Curve
Figure 4.4 Cooling curve for
the solidification of pure
metals. Note that freezing takes
place at a constant temperature;
during freezing the latent heat
of solidification is given off.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-6
Nickel-Copper Alloy Phase Diagram
Figure 4.5 Phase
diagram for nickel-
copper alloy system
obtained at a slow
rate of solidification.
Note that pure nickel
and pure copper each
has one freezing or
melting temperature.
The top circle on the
right depicts the
nucleation of
crystals. The second
circle shows the
formation of
dendrites (see
Section 10.2). The
bottom circle shows
the solidified alloy,
with grain
boundaries.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-7
Mechanical Properties of Copper-Nickel and
Copper-Zinc AlloysFigure 4.6 Mechanical properties of copper-nickel
and copper-zinc alloys as a
function of their
composition. The curves
for zinc are short, because
zinc has a maximum solid
solubility of 40% in copper.
Source: L. H. Van Vlack;
Materials for Engineering.
Addison-Wesley
Publishing Co., Inc., 1982.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-8
Lead-Tin Phase Diagram
Figure 4.7 The
lead-tin phase
diagram. Note that
the composition of
the eutectic point for
this alloy is 61.9%
Sn-38.1% Pb. A
composition either
lower or higher than
this ratio will have a
higher liquidus
temperature.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-9
Iron-Iron Carbide Phase Diagram
Figure 4.8 The iron-iron
carbide phase diagram.
Because of the
importance of steel as an
engineering material, this
diagram is one of the
most important of all
phase diagrams.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-10
Austenite, Ferrite, and Martensite
Figure 4.9 The unit cells for (a) austenite, (b) ferrite, and (c) martensite. The effect of percentage of
carbon (by weight) on the lattice dimensions for martensite is shown in (d). Note the interstitial position
of the carbon atoms (see Fig. 1.9). Note, also, the increase in dimension c with increasing carbon content;
this effect causes the unit cell of martensite to be in the shape of a rectangular prism.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-11
Iron-Carbon Alloy Above and Below Eutectoid
Temperature
Figure 4.10 Schematic illustration
of the microstructures for an iron-
carbon alloy of eutectoid
composition (0.77% carbon), above
and below the eutectoid temperature
of 727 °C (1341 °F).

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-12
Pearlite Microstructure
Figure 4.11 Microstructure of
pearlite in 1080 steel, formed
from austenite of eutectoid
composition. In this lamellar
structure, the lighter regions are
ferrite, and the darker regions are
carbide. Magnification: 2500X.
Source: Courtesy of USX
Corporation.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-13
Extended Iron-Carbon Phase DiagramFigure 4.12 Phase diagram for the iron-carbon system with graphite (instead
of cementite) as the stable phase. Note that this figure is an extended version
of Fig. 4.8.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-14
Microstructures for Cast Irons
(a)
(b)
(c)
Figure 4.13 Microstructure for cast irons. Magnification: 100X. (a) Ferritic gray iron with graphite flakes. (b)
Ferritic Ductile iron (nodular iron), with graphite in nodular form. (c) Ferritic malleable iron; this cast iron
solidified as white cast iron, with the carbon present as cementite, and was heat treated to graphitize the carbon.
Source: ASM International.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-15
Austenite to
Pearlite
Transformation
Figure 4.14 (a) Austenite-
to-pearlite transformation
of iron-carbon alloy as a
functionof time and
temperature. (b)
Isothermal transformation
diagram obtained from (a)
for a transformation
temperature of 675 °C
(1247 °F). (continued)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-16
Austenite to Pearlite Transformation (cont.)
Figure 4.14 (c) Microstructures
obtained for a eutectoid iron-carbon
alloy as a function of cooling rate.
Source: ASM International.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-17
Hardness and Toughness of Annealed Steels
Figure 4.15 (a) and (b) Hardness and (c) toughness for annealed plain-carbon steels, as a function of carbide
shape. Carbides in the pearlite are lamellar. Fine pearlite is obtained by increasing the cooling rate. The
spheroidite structure has spherelike carbide particles. Note htat the percentage of pearlite begins to decrease
after 0.77% carbon. Source: L. H. Van Vlack; Materials for Engineering. Addison-Wesley Publishing Co.,
Inc., 1982.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-18
Mechanical Properties of Annealed Steels
Figure 4.16 Mechanical properties of annealed steels, as a function of composition and microstructure. Note
(in (a)) the increase in hardness and strength and (in (b)) the decrease in ductility and toughness, with
increasing amounts of pearlite and iron carbide. Source: L. H. Van Vlack; Materials for Engineering.
Addison-Wesley Publishing Co., Inc., 1982.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-19
Eutectoid Steel Microstructure
Figure 4.17 Microstructure
of eutectoid steel.
Spheroidite is formed by
tempering the steel at 700 °C
(1292 °F). Magnification:
1000X. Source: Courtesy of
USX Corporation.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-20
Martensite
(b)
Figure 4.18 (a) Hardness of martensite, as a function of carbon content. (b) Micrograph of martensite
containing 0.8% carbon. The gray platelike regions are martensite; they have the same composition as the
original austenite (white regions). Magnification: 1000X. Source: Courtesy of USX Corporation.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-21
Hardness of Tempered Martensite
Figure 4.19 Hardness
of tempered
martensite, as a
function of tempering
time, for 1080 steel
quenched to 65 HRC.
Hardness decreases
because the carbide
particles coalesce and
grow in size, thereby
increasing the
interparticle distance
of the softer ferrite.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-22
End-Quench
Hardenability
Test
Figure 4.20 (a)
End-quench test
and cooling rate.
(b) Hardenability
curves for five
different steels, as
obtained from the
end-quench test.
Small variations in
composition can
change the shape of
these curves. Each
curve is actually a
band, and its exact
determination is
important in the
heat treatment of
metals, for better
control of
properties. Source:
L. H. Van Vlack;
Materials for
Engineering.
Addison-Wesley
Publishing Co.,
Inc., 1982.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-23
Aluminum-Copper Phase Diagram
Figure 4.21 (a) Phase diagram for the aluminum-copper alloy system. (b) Various micro-
structures obtained during the age-hardening process. Source: L. H. Van Vlack; Materials for
Engineering. Addison-Wesley Publishing Co., Inc., 1982.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-24
Age Hardening
Figure 4.22 The effect of aging
time and temperature on the yield
stress of 2014-T4 aluminum alloy.
Note that, for each temperature,
there is an optimal aging time for
maximum strength.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-25
Outline of Heat Treatment Processes for
Surface Hardening
TABLE 4.1Process Metals hardened Element added to
surface
Procedure General Characteristics Typical applications
Carburizing Low-carbon steel
(0.2% C), alloy
steels (0.08–0.2%
C)
C Heat steel at 870–950 °C (1600–1750
°F) in an atmosphere of carbonaceous
gases (gas carburizing) or carbon-
containing solids
(pack carburizing). Then quench.
A hard, high-carbon surface is
produced. Hardness 55 to 65
HRC. Case depth < 0.5–1.5 mm
( < 0.020 to 0.060 in.). Some
distortion of part during heat
treatment.
Gears, cams, shafts,
bearings, piston pins,
sprockets, clutch plates
Carbonitriding Low-carbon steel C and N Heat steel at 700–800 °C (1300–1600
°F) in an atmosphere of carbonaceous
gas and ammonia. Then quench in oil.
Surface hardness 55 to 62 HRC.
Case depth 0.07 to 0.5 mm
(0.003 to 0.020 in.). Less
distortion than in
carburizing.
Bolts, nuts, gears
Cyaniding Low-carbon steel
(0.2% C), alloy
steels (0.08–0.2%
C)
C and N Heat steel at 760–845 °C (1400–1550
°F) in a molten bath of solutions of
cyanide (e.g., 30% sodium cyanide) and
other salts.
Surface hardness up to 65 HRC.
Case depth 0.025 to 0.25 mm
(0.001 to 0.010 in.). Some
distortion.
Bolts, nuts, screws, small
gears
Nitriding Steels (1% Al,
1.5% Cr, 0.3%
Mo), alloy steels
(Cr, Mo), stainless
steels, high-speed
tool steels
N Heat steel at 500–600 °C (925–1100 °F)
in an atmosphere of ammonia gas or
mixtures of molten cyanide salts. No
further treatment.
Surface hardness up to 1100
HV. Case depth 0.1 to 0.6 mm
(0.005 to 0.030 in.) and 0.02 to
0.07 mm (0.001
to 0.003 in.) for high speed
steel.
Gears, shafts, sprockets,
valves, cutters, boring
bars, fuel-injection pump
parts
Boronizing Steels B Part is heated using boron-containing
gas or solid in contact with part.
Extremely hard and wear
resistant surface. Case depth
0.025– 0.075 mm (0.001–
0.003 in.).
Tool and die steels
Flame hardening Medium-carbon
steels, cast irons
None Surface is heated with an oxyacetylene
torch, then quenched with water spray or
other quenching methods.
Surface hardness 50 to 60 HRC.
Case depth 0.7 to 6 mm (0.030
to 0.25 in.). Little distortion.
Gear and sprocket teeth,
axles, crankshafts, piston
rods, lathe beds and
centers
Induction hardening
Same as above None Metal part is placed in copper induction
coils and is heated by high frequency
current, then quenched.
Same as above Same as above

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-26
Heat Treatment Processes
Figure 4.23 Heat-treating temperature ranges for
plain-carbon steels, as indicated on the iron-iron
carbide phase diagram. Source: ASM
International.
Figure 4.24 Hardness of steels in the quenched and
normalized conditions, as a function of carbon content.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-27
Properties of Oil-Quenched Steel
Figure 4.25 Mechanical properties of
oil-quenched 4340 steel, as a function
of tempering temperature. Source:
Courtesy of LTV Steel Company

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 4-28
Induction Heating
Figure 4.26 Types of coils used in induction heating of various surfaces of parts.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 5-1
CHAPTER 5
Ferrous Metals and Alloys: Production,
General Properties, and Applications

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 5-2
Blast Furnace
Figure 5.1
Schematic
illustration of a
blast furnace.
Source: Courtesy
of American Iron
and Steel Institute.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 5-3
Electric Furnaces
Figure 5.2 Schematic illustration of types of electric furnaces: (a) direct arc, (b) indirect arc, and (c) induction.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 5-4
Basic-Oxygen Process
Figure 5.3 Schematic
illustrations showing
(a) charging, (b)
melting, and (c)
pouring of molten iron
in a basic-oxygen
process. Source:
Inland Steel Company

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 5-5
Continuous
Casting
Figure 5.4 The
continuous-casting
process for steel.
Typically, the solidified
metal descends at a speed
of 25 mm/s (1 in./s).
Note that the platform is
about 20 m (65 ft) above
ground level. Source:
Metalcaster's Reference
and Guide, American
Foundrymen's Society.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 5-6
Typical Selection of Carbon and Alloy Steels for
Various Applications
TABLE 5.1
Product Steel Product Steel
Aircraft forgings,
tubing, fittings
Automobile bodies
Axles
Ball bearings and races
Bolts
Camshafts
Chains (transmission)
Coil springs
Connecting rods
Crankshafts (forged)
4140, 8740
1010
1040, 4140
52100
1035, 4042, 4815
1020, 1040
3135, 3140
4063
1040, 3141, 4340
1045, 1145, 3135, 3140
Differential gears
Gears (car and truck)
Landing gear
Lock washers
Nuts
Railroad rails and wheels
Springs (coil)
Springs (leaf)
Tubing
Wire
Wire (music)
4023
4027, 4032
4140, 4340, 8740
1060
3130
1080
1095, 4063, 6150
1085, 4063, 9260, 6150
1040
1045, 1055
1085

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 5-7
Mechanical Properties of Selected Carbon and
Alloy Steels in Various Conditions
TABLE 5.2 Typical Mechanical Properties of Selected Carbon and Alloy Steels in the Hot-Rolled,
Normalized, and Annealed ConditionAISI Condition Ultimate
tensile
strength
(MPa)
Yield
Strength
(MPa)
Elongation in
50 mm (%)
Reduction of
area (%)
Hardness
(HB)
1020
1080
3140
4340
8620
As-rolled
Normalized
Annealed
As-rolled
Normalized
Annealed
Normalized
Annealed
Normalized
Annealed
Normalized
Annealed
448
441
393
1010
965
615
891
689
1279
744
632
536
346
330
294
586
524
375
599
422
861
472
385
357
36
35
36
12
11
24
19
24
12
22
26
31
59
67
66
17
20
45
57
50
36
49
59
62
143
131
111
293
293
174
262
197
363
217
183
149

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 5-8
AISI Designation for High-Strength Sheet
Steel
TABLE 5.3
Yield Strength Chemical
Composition
Deoxidation
Practice
psi x 10
3
MPa
35 40 45 50 60
70
80
100
120
140
240
275
310
350
415
485
550
690
830
970
S = structural alloy
X = low alloy
W = weathering
D = dual phase
F = killed plus sulfide inclusion control
K = killed
O = nonkilled

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 5-9
Room-Temperature Mechanical Properties and
Applications of Annealed Stainless Steels
TABLE 5.4 Room-Temperature Mechanical Properties and Typical Applications of Selected Annealed
Stainless Steels
AISI
(UNS)
Ultimate
tensile
strength
(MPa)
Yield
strength
(MPa)
Elongation
in 50 mm
(%) Characteristics and typical applications
303
(S30300)
550–620 240–260 53–50 Screw machine products, shafts, valves, bolts,
bushings, and nuts; aircraft fittings; bolts; nuts;
rivets; screws; studs.
304
(S30400)
565–620 240–290 60–55 Chemical and food processing equipment,
brewing equipment, cryogenic vessels, gutters,
downspouts, and flashings.
316
(S31600)
550–590 210–290 60–55 High corrosion resistance and high creep strength.
Chemical and pulp handling equipment,
photographic equipment, brandy vats, fertilizer
parts, ketchup cooking kettles, and yeast tubs.
410
(S41000)
480–520 240–310 35–25 Machine parts, pump shafts, bolts, bushings, coal
chutes, cutlery, tackle, hardware, jet engine parts,
mining machinery, rifle barrels, screws, and
valves.
416
(S41600)
480–520 275 30–20 Aircraft fittings, bolts, nuts, fire extinguisher
inserts, rivets, and screws.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 5-10
Basic Types of Tool and Die Steels
TABLE 5.5
Type AISI
High speed
Hot work
Cold work
Shock resisting
Mold steels
Special purpose
Water hardening
M (molybdenum base)
T (tungsten base)
H1 to H19 (chromium base)
H20 to H39 (tungsten base)
H40 to H59 (molybdenum base)
D (high carbon, high chromium)
A (medium alloy, air hardening)
O (oil hardening)
S
P1 to P19 (low carbon)
P20 to P39 (others)
L (low alloy)
F (carbon-tungsten)
W

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 5-11
Processing and Service Characteristics of
Common Tool and Die Steels
TABLE 5.6 Processing and Service Characteristics of Common Tool and Die SteelsAISI
designation
Resistance to
decarburization
Resistance to
cracking
Approximate
hardness
(HRC) Machinability Toughness
Resistance to
softening
Resistance to
wear
M2 Medium Medium 60–65 Medium Low Very high Very highT1 High High 60–65 Medium Low Very high Very high T5 Low Medium 60–65 Medium Low Highest Very high H11, 12, 13 Medium Highest 38–55 Medium to high Very high High Medium A2 Medium Highest 57–62 Medium Medium High High
A9 Medium Highest 35–56 Medium High High Medium to
high
D2 Medium Highest 54–61 Low Low High High to very
high
D3 Medium High 54–61 Low Low High Very high
H21 Medium High 36–54 Medium High High Medium to
high
H26 Medium High 43–58 Medium Medium Very high High
P20 High High 28–37 Medium to high High Low Low to
medium
P21 High Highest 30–40 Medium Medium Medium Medium
W1, W2 Highest Medium 50–64 Highest High Low Low to
medium
Source: Adapted from Tool Steels, American Iron and Steel Institute, 1978.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 6-1
CHAPTER 6
Nonferrous Metals and Alloys:
Production, General Properties, and
Applications

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 6-2
Approximate Cost per Unit Volume for Wrought
Metals and Plastics Relative to Carbon Steel
TABLE 6.1 Approximate Cost per Unit Volume for Wrought Metals and Plastics Relative to
Cost of Carbon SteelGold
Silver
Molybdenum alloys
Nickel
Titanium alloys
Copper alloys
Zinc alloys
Stainless steels
60,000
600
200–250
35
20–40
5–6
1.5–3.5
2–9
Magnesium alloys
Aluminum alloys
High-strength low-alloy steels
Gray cast iron
Carbon steel
Nylons, acetals, and silicon rubber
*
Other plastics and elastomers
*
2–4
2–3
1.4
1.2
1
1.1–2
0.2–1
*As molding compounds.
Note: Costs vary significantly with quantity of purchase, supply and demand, size and shape, and various other factors.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 6-3
General Characteristics of Nonferrous Metals
and Alloys
TABLE 6.2Material Characteristics
Nonferrous alloys More expensive than steels and plastics; wide range of mechanical, physical, and
electrical properties; good corrosion resistance; high-temperature applications.
Aluminum High strength-to-weight ratio; high thermal and electrical conductivity; good
corrosion resistance; good manufacturing properties.
Magnesium Lightest metal; good strength-to-weight ratio.
Copper High electrical and thermal conductivity; good corrosion resistance; good
manufacturing properties.
Superalloys Good strength and resistance to corrosion at elevated temperatures; can be iron-,
cobalt-, and nickel-base.
Titanium Highest strength-to-weight ratio of all metals; good strength and corrosion
resistance at high temperatures.
Refractory metals Molybdenum, niobium (columbium), tungsten, and tantalum; high strength at
elevated temperatures.
Precious metals Gold, silver, and platinum; generally good corrosion resistance.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 6-4
Example of Alloy Usage
Figure 6.1 Cross-
section of a jet
engine (PW2037)
showing various
components and the
alloys used in
manufacturing
them. Source:
Courtesy of United
Aircraft Pratt &
Whitney.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 6-5
Properties of Selected Aluminum Alloys at
Room Temperature
TABLE 6.3Alloy (UNS) Temper
Ultimate tensile
strength (MPa)
Yield strength
(MPa)
Elongation
in 50 mm
(%)
1100 (A91100)
1100
2024 (A92024)
2024
3003 (A93003)
3003
5052 (A95052)
5052
6061 (A96061)
60617075 (A97075)
7075
O
H14
O
T4
O
H14
O
H34
O
T6O
T6
90
125
190
470
110
150
190
260
125
310230
570
35
120
75
325
40
145
90
215
55
275105
500
35–45
9–20
20–22
19–20
30–40
8–16
25–30
10–14
25–30
12–1716–17
11

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 6-6
Manufacturing Properties and Applications of
Selected Wrought Aluminum Alloys
TABLE 6.4
Characteristics*
Alloy
Corrosion
resistance Machinability Weldability Typical applications1100 A C–D A Sheet metal work, spun hollow ware, tin
stock
2024 C B–C B–C Truck wheels, screw machine products,
aircraft structures
3003 A C–D A Cooking utensils, chemical equipment,
pressure vessels, sheet metal work,
builders’ hardware, storage tanks
5052 A C–D A Sheet metal work, hydraulic tubes, and
appliances; bus, truck and marine uses
6061 B C–D A Heavy-duty structures where corrosion
resistance is needed, truck and marine
structures, railroad cars, furniture,
pipelines, bridge rail-ings, hydraulic
tubing
7075 C B–D D Aircraft and other structures, keys,
hydraulic fittings
* A, excellent; D, poor.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 6-7
All-Aluminum Automobile
Figure 6.2 (a) The Audi A8
automobile which has an all-
aluminum body structure. (b) The
aluminum body structure, showing
various components made by
extrusion, sheet forming, and casting
processes. Source: Courtesy of
ALCOA, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 6-8
Properties and Typical Forms of Selected
Wrought Magnesium Alloys
TABLE 6.5
Composition (%)
Ultimate
tensile Yield Elongation
Alloy Al ZnMn Zr Condition
strength
(MPa)
strength
(MPa)
in 50 mm
(%) Typical formsAZ31 B 3.0 1.0 0.2 F 260 200 15 Extrusions
H24 290 220 15 Sheet and plates
AZ80A 8.5 0.5 0.2 T5 380 275 7 Extrusions and
forgings
HK31A 3Th 0.7 H24 255 200 8 Sheet and plates
ZK60A 5.7 0.55 T5 365 300 11 Extrusions and
forgings

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 6-9
Properties and Typical Applications of Selected
Wrought Copper and BrassesTABLE 6.6Type and UNS
number
Nominal
composition (%)
Ultimate
tensile
strength
(MPa)
Yield
strength
(MPa)
Elongation
in 50 mm
(%) Typical applications
Electrolytic tough pitch
copper (C11000)
99.90 Cu, 0.04 O 220–450 70–365 55–4 Downspouts, gutters, roofing,
gaskets, auto radiators, busbars,
nails, printing rolls, rivetsRed brass, 85%
(C23000)
85.0 Cu, 15.0 Zn 270–725 70–435 55–3 Weather-stripping, conduits,
sockets, fas-teners, fire
extinguishers, condenser and heat
exchanger tubing
Cartridge brass, 70%
(C26000)
70.0 Cu, 30.0 Zn 300–900 75–450 66–3 Radiator cores and tanks , flashlight
shells, lamp fixtures, fasteners,
locks, hinges, ammunition
components, plumbing accessories
Free-cutting brass
(C36000)
61.5 Cu, 3.0 Pb,
35.5 Zn
340–470 125–310 53–18 Gears, pinions, automatic high-
speed screw machine parts
Naval brass
(C46400 to C46700)
60.0 Cu, 39.25 Zn,
0.75 Sn
380–610 170–455 50–17 Aircraft turnbuckle barrels, balls,
bolts, marine hardware, propeller
shafts, rivets, valve stems,
condenser plates

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 6-10
Properties and Typical Applications of Selected
Wrought Bronzes
TABLE 6.7Type and UNS number
Nominal
composition (%)
Ultimate
tensile
strength
(MPa)
Yield
strength
(MPa)
Elongation
in 50 mm
(%) Typical applications
Architectural bronze (C38500)
57.0 Cu, 3.0 Pb,
40.0 Zn
415 (As
extruded)
140 30 Architectural extrusions, store
fronts, thresholds, trim, butts,
hinges
Phosphor bronze, 5% A
(C51000)
95.0 Cu, 5.0 Sn,
trace P
325–960 130–550 64–2 Bellows, clutch disks, cotter pins,
diaphragms, fasteners, wire
brushes, chemical hardware, textile
machinery
Free-cutting phosphor
bronze (C54400)
88.0 Cu, 4.0 Pb,
4.0 Zn, 4.0 Sn
300–520 130–435 50–15 Bearings, bushings, gears, pinions,
shafts, thrust washers, valve parts
Low silicon bronze, B
(C65100)
98.5 Cu, 1.5 Si 275–655 100–475 55–11 Hydraulic press ure lines, bolts,
marine hardware, electrical
conduits, heat exchanger tubing
Nickel silver, 65–10
(C74500)
65.0 Cu, 25.0 Zn,
10.0 Ni
340–900 125–525 50–1 Rivets, screws, slide fasteners,
hollow ware, nameplates

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 6-11
Properties and Typical Applications of Selected
Nickel Alloys
TABLE 6.8 Properties and Typical Applications of Selected Nickel Alloys (All are Trade Names)Type and UNS number
Nominal
composition (%)
Ultimate
tensile
strength
(MPa)
Yield
strength
(MPa)
Elongation
in 50 mm
(%) Typical applications
Nickel 200 (annealed) None 380–550 100–275 60–40 Chemical and food processing
industry, aerospace equipment,
electronic parts
Duranickel 301 4.4 Al, 0.6 Ti 1300 900 28 Springs, plastics extrusion equipment,
(age hardened) molds for glass,
diaphragms
Monel R-405 (hot
rolled)
30 Cu 525 230 35 Screw-machine products, water meter
parts
Monel K-500 29 Cu, 3 Al 1050 750 30 Pump shafts, valve stems, springs (age
hardened)
Inconel 600 (annealed) 15 Cr, 8 Fe 640 210 48 Gas turbine parts, heat-treating
equipment, electronic parts, nuclear
reactors
Hastelloy C-4 (solution-
treated and quenched)
16 Cr, 15 Mo 785 400 54 High temperature stability, resistance
to stress-corrosion cracking

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 6-12
Properties and Typical Applications of Selected
Nickel-Base Superalloys at 870 °C
TABLE 6.9 Properties and Typical Applications of Selected Nickel-Base Superalloys at 870 °C
(1600 °F) (All are Trade Names)Alloy Condition
Ultimate
tensile
strength
(MPa)
Yield
strength
(MPa)
Elongation
in 50 mm
(%) Typical applications
Astroloy Wrought 770 690 25 Forgings for high temperatureHastelloy X Wrought 255 180 50 Jet engine sheet parts
IN-100 Cast 885 695 6 Jet engine blades and wheels
IN-102 Wrought 215 200 110 Superheater and jet engine parts
Inconel 625 Wrought 285 275 125 Aircraft engines and structures,
chemical processing equipment
lnconel 718 Wrought 340 330 88 Jet engine and rocket parts
MAR-M 200 Cast 840 760 4 Jet engine blades
MAR-M 432 Cast 730 605 8 Integrally cast turbine wheels
René 41 Wrought 620 550 19 Jet engine parts
Udimet 700 Wrought 690 635 27 Jet engine parts
Waspaloy Wrought 525 515 35 Jet engine parts

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 6-13
Properties and Typical Applications of Selected
Wrought Titanium Alloys
TABLE 6.10 Properties and Typical Applications of Selected Wrought Titanium Alloys at Various
TemperaturesNominal
compos-
ition
(%) UNS Condition
Ultimate
tensile
strength
(MPa)
Yield
strength
(MPa)
Elonga-
tion (%)
Reduc-
tion of
area (%)
Temp.
(°C)
Ultimate
tensile
strength
(MPa)
Yield
strength
(MPa)
Elonga-
tion in
50 mm
(%)
Reduc-
tion of
area Typical Applications
99.5 Ti R50250 Annealed 330 240 30 55 300 150 95 32 80 Airframes; chemi cal,
desalination, and
marine parts; plate
type heat exchangers
5 Al, 2.5 Sn
R54520 Annealed 860 810 16 40 300 565 450 18 45 Aircraft engine
compressor blades and
ducting; steam turbine
blades
6 Al,
4V
R56400 Annealed 1000 925 14 30 300 725 650 14 35 Rocket motor cases;
blades and disks for
aircraft turbines and
compressors;
structural forgings and
fasteners; orthopedic
implants
425 670 570 18 40
550 530 430 35 50
Solution +
age
1175 1100 10 20 300 980 900 10 28
12 35
22 45
13 V,
11 Cr,
3 Al
R58010 Solution +
age
1275 1210 8 — 425 1100 830 12 — High strength
fasteners; aerospace
components;
honeycomb panels

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-1
CHAPTER 7
Polymers: Structure, General Properties
and Applications

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-2
Range of Mechanical Properties for Various
Engineering Plastics
TABLE 7.1
Material UTS (MPa) E (GPa)
Elongation
(%)
Poisson’s
ratio (
ν
)
ABS
ABS, reinforced
Acetal
Acetal, reinforced
Acrylic
Cellulosic
Epoxy
Epoxy, reinforced
Fluorocarbon
Nylon
Nylon, reinforced
Phenolic
Polycarbonate
Polycarbonate, reinforced
Polyester
Polyester, reinforced
Polyethylene
Polypropylene
Polypropylene, reinforced
Polystyrene
Polyvinyl chloride
28–55
100
55–70
135
40–75
10–48
35–140
70–1400
7–48
55–83
70–210
28–70
55–70
110
55
110–160
7–40
20–35
40–100
14–83
7–55
1.4–2.8
7.5
1.4–3.5
10
1.4–3.5
0.4–1.4
3.5–17
21–52
0.7–2
1.4–2.8
2–10
2.8–21
2.5–3
6
2
8.3–12
0.1–1.4
0.7–1.2
3.5–6
1.4–4
0.014–4
75–5

75–25

50–5
100–5
10–1
4–2
300–100
200–60
10–1
2–0
125–10
6–4
300–5
3–1
1000–15
500–10
4–2
60–1
450–40

0.35

0.35–0.40




0.46–0.48
0.32–0.40


0.38

0.38

0.46


0.35

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-3
Chapter 7 Outline
Figure 7.1 Outline of the topics described in Chapter 7

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-4
Structure of
Polymer
Molecules
Figure 7.2 Basic structure of polymer molecules: (a) ethylene molecule; (b)
polyethylene, a linear chain of many ethylene molecules; © molecular structure
of various polymers. These are examples of the basic building blocks for
plastics

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-5
Molecular Weight and Degree of Polymerization
Figure 7.3 Effect of molecular weight
and degree of polymerization on the
strength and viscosity of polymers.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-6
Polymer Chains
Figure 7.4 Schematic
illustration of polymer chains.
(a) Linear structure--
thermoplastics such as
acrylics, nylons, polyethylene,
and polyvinyl chloride have
linear structures. (b) Branched
structure, such as in
polyethylene. (c) Cross-linked
structure--many rubbers or
elastomers have this structure,
and the vulcanization of rubber
produces this structure. (d)
Network structure, which is
basically highly cross-linked--
examples are thermosetting
plastics, such as epoxies and
phenolics.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-7
Polymer Behavior
Figure 7.5 Behavior of polymers as a function of temperature and (a) degree of crystallinity and (b)
cross-linking. The combined elastic and viscous behavior of polymers is known as viscoelasticity.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-8
Crystallinity
Figure 7.6 Amorphous
and crystalline regions in
a polymer. The crystalline
region (crystallite) has an
orderly arrangement of
molecules. The higher the
crystallinity, the harder,
stiffer, and less ductile the
polymer.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-9
Specific Volume as a Function of Temperature
Figure 7.7 Specific volume of polymers
as a function of temperature. Amorphous
polymers, such as acrylic and
polycarbonate, have a glass-transition
temperature, T
g
, but do not have a specific
melting point, T
m
. Partly crystalline
polymers, such as polyethylene and
nylons, contract sharply while passing
through their melting temperatures during
cooling.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-10
Glass-Transition and Melting Temperatures of
Some Polymers
TABLE 7.2
Material T
g
(°C) T
m
(°C)
Nylon 6,6
Polycarbonate
Polyester
Polyethylene
High density
Low density
Polymethylmethacrylate
Polypropylene
Polystyrene
Polytetrafluoroethylene
Polyvinyl chloride
Rubber
57
150
73
–90
–110
105
–14
100
–90
87
–73
265
265
265
137
115

176
239
327
212

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-11
Behavior of Plastics
Figure 7.8 General terminology describing
the behavior of three types of plastics. PTFE
(polytetrafluoroethylene) has Teflon as its
trade name. Source: R. L. E. Brown.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-12
Temperature Effects
Figure 7.9 Effect of temperature on the stress-strain
curve for cellulose acetate, a thermoplastic. Note the
large drop in strength and the large increase in
ductility with a relatively small increase in
temperature. Source: After T. S. Carswell and H. K.
Nason.
Figure 7.10 Effect of temperature on the impact
strength of various plastics. Small changes in
temperature can have a significant effect on impact
strength. Source: P. C. Powell.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-13
Elongation
(a)
(b) Figure 7.11 (a) Load-
elongation curve for
polycarbonate, a
thermoplastic. Source: R. P.
Kambour and R. E.
Robertson. (b) High-density
polyethylene tensile-test
specimen, showing uniform
elongation (the long, narrow
region in the specimen).

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-14
General Recommendations for Plastic ProductsTABLE 7.3
Design requirement Applications Plastics
Mechanical strength Gears, cams, rollers, valves, fan
blades, impellers, pistons
Acetal, nylon, phenolic,
polycarbonate
Functional and decorative Handles, knobs, camera and
battery cases, trim moldings, pipe
fittings
ABS, acrylic, cellulosic,
phenolic, polyethylene,
polypropylene, polystyrene,
polyvinyl chloride
Housings and hollow shapes Power tools, pumps, housings,
sport helmets, telephone cases
ABS, cellulosic, phenolic,
polycarbonate, polyethylene,
polypropylene, polystyrene
Functional and transparent Lenses, goggles, safety glazing,
signs, food-processing
equipment, laboratory hardware
Acrylic, polycarbonate,
polystyrene, polysulfone
Wear resistance Gears, wear strips and liners,
bearings, bushings, roller-skate
wheels
Acetal, nylon, phenolic,
polyimide, polyurethane,
ultrahigh molecular weight
polyethylene

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-15
Load-Elongation Curve for Rubber
Figure 7.12 Typical load-elongation
curve for rubbers. The clockwise lop,
indicating the loading and the
unloading paths, displays the hysteresis
loss. Hysteresis gives rubbers the
capacity to dissipate energy, damp
vibraion, and absorb shock loading, as
is necessary in automobile tires and in
vibration dampers placed under
machinery.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 8-1
CHAPTER 8
Ceramics, Graphite, and Diamond:
Structure, General Properties, and
Applications

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 8-2
Examples of Ceramics
(a)
(b)
Figure 8.1 A variety of ceramic components. (a) High-strength alumina for high-temperature
applications. (b) Gas-turbine rotors made of silicon nitride. Source: Wesgo Div., GTE.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 8-3
Types and
General
Characteristics
of Ceramics
TABLE 8.1
Type General Characteristics
Oxide ceramics
Alumina High hardness, moderate strength; most widely used ceramic;
cutting tools, abrasives, electrical and thermal insulation.
Zirconia High strength and toughness; thermal expansion close to cast iron;
suitable for heat engine components.
Carbides
Tungsten carbide Hardness, strength, and wear resistance depend on cobalt binder
content; commonly used for dies and cutting tools.
Titanium carbide Not as tough as tungsten carbide; has nickel and molybdenum as
the binder; used as cutting tools.
Silicon carbide High-temperature strength and wear resistance; used for heat
engines and as abrasives.
Nitrides
Cubic boron nitride Second-hardest substance known, after diamond; used as abrasives
and cutting tools.
Titanium nitride Gold in color; used as coatings because of low frictional
characteristics.
Silicon nitride High resistance to creep and thermal shock; used in heat engines.
Sialon Consists of silicon nitrides and other oxides and carbides; used as
cutting tools.
Cermets Consist of oxides, carbides, and nitrides; used in high-temperature
applications.
Silica High temperature resistance; quartz exhibits piezoelectric effect;
silicates containing various oxides are used in high-temperature
nonstructural applications.
Glasses Contain at least 50 percent silica; amorphous structures; several
types available with a range of mechanical and physical properties.
Glass ceramics Have a high crystalline component to their structure; good thermal-
shock resistance and strong.
Graphite Crystalline form of carbon; high electrical and thermal
conductivity; good thermal shock resistance.
Diamond Hardest substance known; available as single c rystal or
polycrystalline form; used as cutting tools and abrasives and as dies
for fine wire drawing.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 8-4
Properties of Various Ceramics at Room
Temperature
TABLE 8.2Material Symbol
Transverse
rupture
strength
(MPa)
Compressive
strength
(MPa)
Elastic
modulus
(GPa)
Hardness
(HK)
Poisson’s
ratio (
ν
)
Density
(kg/m
3
)
Aluminum
oxide
Al
2
O
3
140–240 1000–2900 310–410 2000–3000 0.26 4000–4500
Cubic boron
nitride
CBN 725 7000 850 4000–5000 — 3480
Diamond — 1400 7000 830–1000 7000–8000 — 3500
Silica, fused SiO
2
— 1300 70 550 0.25 —
Silicon
carbide
SiC 100–750 700–3500 240–480 2100–3000 0.14 3100
Silicon
nitride
Si
3
N
4
480–600 — 300–310 2000–2500 0.24 3300
Titanium
carbide
TiC 1400–1900 3100–3850 310–410 1800–3200 — 5500–5800
Tungsten
carbide
WC 1030–2600 4100–5900 520–700 1800–2400 — 10,000–15,000
Partially
stabilized
zirconia
PSZ 620 — 200 1100 0.30 5800
Note: These properties vary widely depending on the condition of the material.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 8-5
Properties of Various Glasses
TABLE 8.3
Soda-lime
glass
Lead glass Borosilicate
glass
96 Percent
silica
Fused
silica
Density High Highest Medium Low LowestStrength Low Low Moderate High Highest
Resistance to thermal
shock
Low Low Good Better Best
Electrical resistivity Moderate Best Good Good Good
Hot workability Good Best Fair Poor Poorest
Heat treatability Good Good Poor None None
Chemical resistance Poor Fair Good Better Best
Impact-abrasion
resistance
Fair Poor Good Good Best
Ultraviolet-light
transmission
Poor Poor Fair Good Good
Relative cost Lowest Low Medium High Highest

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 8-6
Graphite Components
Figure 8.2 Various
engineering
components made of
graphite. Source: Poco
Graphite, Inc., a Unocal
Co.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-1
CHAPTER 9
Composite Materials: Structure, General
Properties, and Applications

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-2
Application of Advanced Composite Materials
Figure 9.1
Application of
advanced
composite
materials in
Boeing 757-200
commercial
aircraft. Source:
Boeing
Commercial
Airplane
Company.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-3
Methods of Reinforcing Plastics
Figure 9.2 Schematic
illustration of methods
of reinforcing plastics
(matrix) with (a)
particles, and (b) short
or long fibers or
flakes. The four layers
of continuous fibers in
illustration (c) are
assembled into a
laminate structure.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-4
Types and General Characteristics of
Composite Materials
TABLE 9.1
Material Characteristics
Fibers Glass High strength, low stiffness, high density; lowest cost; E (calcium aluminoborosilicate) and S
(magnesia-aluminosilicate) types commonly used.
Graphite Available as high-modulus or high-strength; low cost; less dense than glass.
Boron High strength and stiffness; highest density; highest cost; has tungsten filament at its center.
Aramids (Kevlar) Highest strength-to-weight ratio of all fibers; high cost.
Other fibers Nylon, silicon carbide, silicon nitride, aluminum oxide, boron carbide, boron nitride, tantalum
carbide, steel, tungsten, molybdenum.
Matrix materials
Thermosets Epoxy and polyester, with the former most commonly used; others are phenolics,
fluorocarbons, polyethersulfone, silicon, and polyimides.
Thermoplastics Polyetheretherketone; tougher than thermosets but lower resistance to temperature.
Metals Aluminum, aluminum-lithium, magnesium, and titanium; fibers are graphite, aluminum oxide,
silicon carbide, and boron.
Ceramics Silicon carbide, silicon nitride, aluminum oxide, and mullite; fibers are various ceramics.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-5
Strength and Stiffness of Reinforced PlasticsFigure 9.3 Specific tensile strength (tensile strength-to-density ratio) and specific tensile modulus
(modulus of elasticity-to-density ratio) for various fibers used in reinforced plastics. Note the wide
range of specific strengths and stiffnesses available.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-6
Typical Properties of Reinforcing Fibers
TABLE 9.2
Type
Tensile
strength
(MPa)
Elastic
modulus
(GPa)
Density
( kg/m
3
) Relative cost
Boron 3500 380 2600 HighestCarbon
High strength 3000 275 1900 Low
High modulus 2000 415 1900 Low
Glass
E type 3500 73 2480 Lowest
S type 4600 85 2540 Lowest
Kevlar
29 2800 62 1440 High
49 2800 117 1440 High
Note: These properties vary significantly depending on the material and method of preparation.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-7
Fiber Reinforcing
Figure 9.4 (a) Cross-section of a tennis racket, showing graphite and aramid (Kevlar) reinforcing fibers. Source:
J. Dvorak, Mercury Marine Corporation, and F. Garrett, Wilson Sporting Goods Co. (b) Cross-section of boron
fiber-reinforced composite material.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-8
Effect of Fiber Type on Fiber-Reinforced Nylon
Figure 9.5 The effect
of type of fiber on
various properties of
fiber-reinforced nylon
(6,6). Source: NASA.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-9
Fracture Surfaces of Fiber-Reinforced Epoxy
Composites
(a)
(b)
Figure 9.6 (a) Fracture surface of glass-fiber reinforced epoxy composite. The fibers are
10 µm (400 µin.) in diameter and have random orientation. (b) Fracture surface of a
graphite-fiber reinforced epoxy composite. The fibers, 9 µm-11 µm in diameter, are in
bundles and are all aligned in the same direction. Source: L. J. Broutman.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-10
Tensile Strength of Glass-Reinforced Polyester
Figure 9.7 The tensile strength
of glass-reinforced polyester as a
function of fiber content and
fiber direction in the matrix.
Source: R. M. Ogorkiewicz, The
Engineering Properties of
Plastics. Oxford: Oxford
University Press, 1977.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-11
Example of Advanced Materials Construction
Figure 9.8 Cross-section of a
composite sailboard, an example
of advanced materials
construction. Source: K.
Easterling, Tomorrow’s Materials
(2d ed.), p. 133. Institute of
Metals, 1990.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-12
Metal-Matrix Composite Materials and
Applications
TABLE 9.3
Fiber Matrix Applications
Graphite Aluminum
Magnesium
Lead
Copper
Satellite, missile, and helicopter structures
Space and satellite structures
Storage-battery plates
Electrical contacts and bearings
Boron Aluminum
Magnesium
Titanium
Compressor blades and structural supports
Antenna structures
Jet-engine fan blades
Alumina Aluminum
Lead
Magnesium
Superconductor restraints in fission power reactors
Storage-battery plates
Helicopter transmission structures
Silicon carbide Aluminum, titanium
Superalloy (cobalt-base)
High-temperature structures
High-temperature engine components
Molybdenum, tungsten Superalloy High-temperature engine components

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 10-1
CHAPTER 10
Fundamentals of Metal-Casting

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 10-2
Cast Structures of Metals
Figure 10.1 Schematic illustration of
three cast structures of metals
solidified in a square mold: (a) pure
metals; (b) solid-solution alloys; and
(c) structure obtained by using
nucleating agents. Source: G. W.
Form, J. F. Wallace, J. L. Walker, and
A. Cibula.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 10-3
Preferred Texture Development
Figure 10.2 Development of a preferred texture at a cool mold wall. Note that only
favorably oriented grains grow away from the surface of the mold.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 10-4
Alloy Solidification
Figure 10.3 Schematic
illustration of alloy
solidification and
temperature
distribution in the
solidifying metal.
Note the formation of
dendrites in the mushy
zone.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 10-5
Solidification Patterns
Figure 10.4 (a) Solidification patterns for gray cast iron in a 180-mm (7-in.) square casting. Note that
after 11 min. of cooling, dendrites reach each other, but the casting is still mushy throughout. It takes
about two hours for this casting to solidify completely. (b) Solidification of carbon steels in sand and
chill (metal) molds. Note the difference in solidification patterns as the carbon content increases.
Source: H. F. Bishop and W. S. Pellini.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 10-6
Cast Structures
Figure 10.5
Schematic
illustration of three
basic types of cast
structures: (a)
columnar dendritic;
(b) equiaxed
dendritic; and (c)
equiaxed
nondendritic.
Source: D. Apelian.
Figure 10.6 Schematic illustration of cast structures
in (a) plane front, single phase, and (b) plane front,
two phase. Source: D. Apelian.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 10-7
Riser-Gated Casting
Figure 10.7 Schematic illustration
of a typical riser-gated casting.
Risers serve as reservoirs,
supplying molten metal to the
casting as it shrinks during
solidification. See also Fig. 11.4
Source: American Foundrymen’s
Society.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 10-8
Fluidity Test
Figure 10.8 A test method for fluidity using
a spiral mold. The fluidity index is the length
of the solidified metal in the spiral passage.
The greater the length of the solidified metal,
the greater is its fluidity.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 10-9
Temperature Distribution
Figure 10.9 Temperature
distribution at the interface of the
mold wall and the liquid metal
during solidification of metals in
casting.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 10-10
Solidification Time
Figure 10.10 Solidified skin on a
steel casting. The remaining
molten metal is poured out at the
times indicated in the figure.
Hollow ornamental and decorative
objects are made by a process
called slush casting, which is based
on this principle. Source: H. F.
Taylor, J. Wulff, and M. C.
Flemings.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 10-11
Solidification Contraction for Various Cast
Metals
TABLE 10.1
Metal or alloy
Volumetric
solidification
contraction (%) Metal or alloy
Volumetric
solidification
contraction (%)
Aluminum 6.6 70%Cu–30%Zn 4.5Al–4.5%Cu 6.3 90%Cu–10%Al 4 Al–12%Si 3.8 Gray iron Expansion to 2.5
Carbon steel 2.5–3 Magnesium 4.2
1% carbon steel 4 White iron 4–5.5
Copper 4.9 Zinc 6.5
Source: After R. A. Flinn.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 10-12
Hot Tears
Figure 10.11 Examples of hot tears in castings. These defects occur because
the casting cannot shrink freely during cooling, owing to constraints in
various portions of the molds and cores. Exothermic (heat-producing)
compounds may be used (as exothermic padding) to control cooling at critical
sections to avoid hot tearing.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 10-13
Casting Defects
Figure 10.12 Examples of common defects in castings. These defects can be minimized or eliminated by
proper design and preparation of molds and control of pouring procedures. Source: J. Datsko.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 10-14
Internal and External Chills
Figure 10.13
Various types of
(a) internal and
(b) external chills
(dark areas at
corners), used in
castings to
eliminate porosity
caused by
shrinkage. Chills
are placed in
regions where
there is a larger
volume of metals,
as shown in (c).

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 10-15
Solubility of Hydrogen in Aluminum
Figure 10.14 Solubility of hydrogen in
aluminum. Note the sharp decrease in
solubility as the molten metal begins to
solidify.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-1
CHAPTER 11
Metal-Casting Processes

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-2
Summary of
Casting
Processes
TABLE 11.1
Process Advantages LimitationsS and Al m os t any m etal c as t; no l im it
to s i ze , s hape or we i ght; l ow
tooling cost.
S ome f inis hing r equi re d;
s omewhat coars e finis h; wide
tole rances .
S hel l mold Good dimens ional accuracy and
s ur fac e f inis h; hi gh pr oduc ti on
rate.
Part size limited; expensive
patt er ns and e qui pment
required.
Expendable pattern Most metals cas t with no limit
to s i ze ; c ompl ex s hape s
P atter ns have l ow s t re ngth and
can be cos tly for low quantities
Plaster mold Intricate shapes; good
dimensional accu- racy and
finish; low poros ity.
Limited to nonferrous metals;
limited size and volume of
production; mold mak ing time
relatively long.
Ceramic mold Intri cate s hapes ; c lose
tol erance parts ; good s urfac e
finish.
Limited s i ze.
Inves tment Intri cate s hapes ; excel lent
s urface finis h and accuracy;
almost any metal cast.
Part size limited; expensive
patt er ns , molds , and l abo r.
Permanent mold Good s urface finis h and
dimensional accuracy; low
poros ity; high production rate .
Hi g h m o l d c o s t ; l i m i t e d s ha pe
and i ntr i cac y; not s ui tabl e for
high-melting-point metals .
Die Exce ll ent dimensional ac curacy
and s urface finis h; high
production rate .
Die cost is high; part size
limited; usually limited to
nonferrous metals ; long lead
time.
Centrifugal Large cylindr ical parts with
good qual ity; high production
rate.
Equipment is expens ive; part
shape limited.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-3
Die-Casting Examples
(a)
(b)
Figure 11.1 (a) The Polaroid PDC-2000 digital camera with a AZ91D die-cast, high purity
magnesium case. (b) Two-piece Polaroid camera case made by the hot-chamber die casting
process. Source: Courtesy of Polaroid Corporation and Chicago White Metal Casting, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-4
General Characteristics of Casting Processes
TABLE 11.2
Typical Weig ht (kg)
Typ ical
surface Section thic kness (mm)
Process
mat erials
cast Minimum Maximum
finis h
(µm, R
a
)Porosity*
Shape
complexity*
Dimensional
accuracy* Minimum Maximum
Sa n d A ll 0 .0 5 No limit 5 -2 5 4 1 -2 3 3 No limit
Shell A ll 0.05 100+ 1-3 4 2-3 2 2 --
Expe nda ble
mo ld
p a t t e r n A ll 0 .0 5 No limit 5 -2 0 4 1 2 2 No limit
Plas t er
mo ld
Nonf errous
(A l, M g, Z n ,
Cu) 0.05 50+ 1-2 3 1-2 2 1 --
Investment
A ll
(High melting
p t.) 0 .005 100+ 1-3 3 1 1 1 75
Pe rma n en t
mo ld A ll 0 .5 300 2-3 2 -3 3-4 1 2 5 0
Die
Nonf errous
(A l, M g, Z n ,
Cu) <0.05 50 1-2 1-2 3-4 1 0.5 12
Centrifuga l A ll -- 5000+ 2-10 1-2 3-4 3 2 100
*Relative rating: 1 bes t, 5 wors t .
Note: These ratings are only general; significant variations can occur, depending on the methods used.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-5
Casting Examples
Figure 11.2 Typical gray-
iron castings used in
automobiles, including
transmission valve body
(left) and hub rotor with
disk-brake cylinder (front).
Source: Courtesy of Central
Foundry Division of General
Motors Corporation.
Figure 11.3 A cast transmission housing.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-6
Sand Mold Features
Figure 11.4 Schematic illustration of a sand mold, showing various features.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-7
Figure 11.5 Outline of production steps in a typical sand-casting operation.
Steps in Sand Casting

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-8
Pattern Material Characteristics
TABLE 11.3
Rating
a
CharacteristicWood Aluminum Steel Plastic Cast ironMachinability E G F G G
Wear resistance P G E F E
Strength F G E G G
Weightb E G P G P
Repairability E P G F G
Resistance to:
Corrosionc E E P E P
Swellingc P E E E E
aE, Excellent; G, good; F, fair; P, poor.
bAs a factor in operator fatigue.
cBy water.
Source: D.C. Ekey and W.R. Winter, Introduction to Foundry Technology. New York.
McGraw-Hill, 1958.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-9
Patterns for Sand Casting
Figure 11.6 A typical metal
match-plate pattern used in
sand casting.
Figure 11.7 Taper on patterns for
ease of removal from the sand mold.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-10
Examples of Sand Cores and Chaplets
Figure 11.8 Examples of sand cores showing core prints and chaplets to support cores.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-11
Squeeze Heads
Figure 11.9 Various designs
of squeeze heads for mold
making: (a) conventional
flat head; (b) profile head;
(c) equalizing squeeze
pistons; and (d) flexible
diaphragm. Source: ©
Institute of British
Foundrymen. Used with
permission.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-12
Vertical Flaskless Molding
Figure 11.10 Vertical flaskless molding. (a) Sand is squeezed between two halves of the pattern. (b)
Assembled molds pass along an assembly line for pouring.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-13
Sequence of Operations for Sand Casting
Figure 11.11 Schematic illustration of the sequence of operations for sand casting. Source: Steel
Founders' Society of America. (a) A mechanical drawing of the part is used to generate a design for the
pattern. Considerations such as part shrinkage and draft must be built into the drawing. (b-c) Patterns
have been mounted on plates equipped with pins for alignment. Note the presence of core prints designed
to hold the core in place. (d-e) Core boxes produce core halves, which are pasted together. The cores will
be used to produce the hollow area of the part shown in (a). (f) The cope half of the mold is assembled by
securing the cope pattern plate to the flask with aligning pins, and attaching inserts to form the sprue and
risers. (continued)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-14
Figure 11.11 (g) The flask is rammed with sand and the plate and inserts are removed. (g) The drag half is
produced in a similar manner, with the pattern inserted. A bottom board is placed below the drag and aligned
with pins. (i) The pattern, flask, and bottom board are inverted, and the pattern is withdrawn, leaving the
appropriate imprint. (j) The core is set in place within the drag cavity. (k) The mold is closed by placing the
cope on top of the drag and buoyant forces in the liquid, which might lift the cope. (l) After the metal solidifies,
the casting is removed from the mold. (m) The sprue and risers are cut off and recycled and the casting is
cleaned, inspected, and heat treated (when necessary).
Sequence of Operations for Sand Casting (cont.)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-15
Surface Roughness for Various Metalworking Processes
Figure 11.12 Surface roughness in casting and other metalworking processes. See also Figs. 22.14 and
26.4 for comparison with other manufacturing processes.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-16
Dump-Box Technique
Figure 11.13 A common
method of making shell
molds. Called dump-box
technique, the limitations are
the formation of voids in the
shell and peelback (when
sections of the shell fall off
as the pattern is raised).
Source: ASM International.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-17
Composite Molds
Figure 11.14 (a) Schematic illustration of a semipermanent composite mold. Source: Steel
Castings Handbook, 5th ed. Steel Founders' Society of America, 1980. (b) A composite
mold used in casting an aluminum-alloy torque converter. This part was previously cast in
an all-plaster mold. Source: Metals Handbook, vol. 5, 8th ed.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-18
Expendable Pattern Casting
Figure 11.15
Schematic
illustration of the
expendable
pattern casting
process, also
known as lost
foam or
evaporative
casting.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-19
Ceramic Molds
Figure 11.16 Sequence of operations in
making a ceramic mold. Source: Metals
Handbook, vol. 5, 8th ed.
Figure 11.17 A typical ceramic
mold (Shaw process) for casting
steel dies used in hot forging.
Source: Metals Handbook, vol.
5, 8th ed.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-20
Figure 11.18
Schematic
illustration of
investment
casting, (lost-
wax process).
Castings by this
method can be
made with very
fine detail and
from a variety of
metals. Source:
Steel Founders'
Society of
America.
Investment
Casting

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-21
Investment Casting of a Rotor
Figure 11.19 Investment casting of an integrally cast rotor for a gas turbine. (a) Wax pattern assembly.
(b) Ceramic shell around wax pattern. (c) Wax is melted out and the mold is filled, under a vacuum,
with molten superalloy. (d) The cast rotor, produced to net or near-net shape. Source: Howmet
Corporation.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-22
Investment and Conventionally Cast Rotors
Figure 11.20 Cross-
section and
microstructure of two
rotors: (top)
investment-cast;
(bottom) conventionally
cast. Source: Advanced
Materials and
Processes, October
1990, p. 25 ASM
International

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-23
Vacuum-Casting Process
Figure 11.21 Schematic illustration of the vacuum-casting process. Note that the mold has a
bottom gate. (a) Before and (b) after immersion of the mold into the molten metal. Source:
From R. Blackburn, "Vacuum Casting Goes Commercial," Advanced Materials and Processes,
February 1990, p. 18. ASM International.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-24
Pressure Casting
Figure 11.22 (a) The bottom-pressure casting process utilizes graphite molds for the production of
steel railroad wheels. Source: The Griffin Wheel Division of Amsted Industries Incorporated. (b)
Gravity-pouring method of casting a railroad wheel. Note that the pouring basin also serves as a riser.
Railroad wheels can also be manufactured by forging.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-25
Hot- and Cold-Chamber Die-Casting
Figure 11.23 (a) Schematic illustration of the hot-chamber die-casting process. (b) Schematic
illustration of the cold-chamber die-casting process. Source: Courtesy of Foundry Management and
Technology.
(a)
(b)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-26
Cold-Chamber Die-Casting Machine
(a)
Figure 11.24 (a) Schematic illustration of a cold-chamber die-casting machine.
These machines are large compared to the size of the casting because large forces are
required to keep the two halves of the dies closed.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-27
Figure 11.24 (b) 800-ton hot-chamber die-casting machine, DAM 8005 (made
in Germany in 1998). This is the largest hot-chamber machine in the world
and costs about $1.25 million.
(b)
Hot-Chamber Die-Casting Machine

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-28
Die-Casting Die Cavities
Figure 11.25 Various types of cavities in a die-casting die. Source: Courtesy of
American Die Casting Institute.
Figure 11.26 Examples of
cast-in- place inserts in die
casting. (a) Knurled
bushings. (b) Grooved
threaded rod.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-29
Properties and Typical Applications of
Common Die-Casting Alloys
TABLE 11.4
Alloy
Ultimate
tensile
strength
(MPa)
Yield
strength
(MPa)
Elongation
in 50 mm
(%) ApplicationsAlum inum 380 (3.5 Cu-8.5 S i ) 320 160 2.5 Appl i anc es , automot ive c omponents ,
electrical motor frames and housings
13 (12 S i ) 300 150 2.5 Compl ex s hapes wi th thin wal l s , pa rts
requiring strength at elevated
temperatures
Brass 858 (60 Cu) 380 200 15 Plumbing fiztures , lock hardware,
bushings, ornamental cas tings
Magnes ium AZ91 B (9 Al -0 .7 Zn) 230 160 3 P owe r too ls , automoti ve par ts , s por ti ng
goods
Z inc No. 3 (4 Al ) 280 -- 10 Automoti ve pa rts , off ic e e quipm ent ,
hous ehold utens i ls , building hardware ,
toys
5 (4 Al -1 Cu) 320 -- 7 Appl i anc es , automot ive par ts , bui l ding
hardware , bus ines s equipment
Sourc e: Data from American Die Cas ting Institute

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-30
Centrifugal Casting Process
Figure 11.27 Schematic
illustration of the centrifugal
casting process. Pipes,
cylinder liners, and similarly
shaped parts can be cast with
this process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-31
Semicentrifugal Casting
Figure 11.28 (a) Schematic illustration of the semicentrifugal casting process. Wheels with spokes can
be cast by this process. (b) Schematic illustration of casting by centrifuging. The molds are placed at
the periphery of the machine, and the molten metal is forced into the molds by centrifugal force.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-32
Squeeze-Casting
Figure 11.29 Sequence of operations in the squeeze-casting process. This process combines the
advantages of casting and forging.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-33
Single Crystal Casting of Turbine Blades
(c)
Figure 11.30 Methods of casting turbine blades: (a) directional solidification; (b) method to produce
a single-crystal blade; and (c) a single-crystal blade with the constriction portion still attached.
Source: (a) and (b) B. H. Kear, Scientific American, October 1986; (c) Advanced Materials and
Processes, October 1990, p. 29, ASM International.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-34
Single Crystal Casting
Figure 11.31 Two methods of
crystal growing: (a) crystal
pulling (Czochralski process)
and (b) the floating-zone
method. Crystal growing is
especially important in the
semiconductor industry.
Source: L. H. Van Vlack,
Materials for Engineering.
Addison-Wesley Publishing
Co., Inc., 1982.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-35
Melt Spinning
Figure 11.32 Schematic
illustration of melt-spinning to
produce thin strips of
amorphous metal.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 11-36
Types of Melting Furnaces
Figure 11.33 Two types of melting furnaces used in foundries: (a) crucible, and (b) cupola.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 12-1
CHAPTER 12
Metal Casting: Design, Materials, and
Economics

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 12-2
Casting Design Modifications
Figure 12.1 Suggested design
modifications to avoid defects
in castings. Note that sharp
corners are avoided to reduce
stress concentrations.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 12-3
Casting Cross-Sections
Figure 12.2 Examples of designs showing the importance of maintaining uniform cross- sections in
castings to avoid hot spots and shrinkage cavities.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 12-4
Avoiding Shrinkage Cavities
Figure 12.3 Examples of
design modifications to avoid
shrinkage cavities in castings.
Source: Steel Castings
Handbook, 5th ed. Steel
Founders' Society of America,
1980. Used with permission.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 12-5
Chills
Figure 12.4 The use of
metal padding (chills) to
increase the rate of cooling
in thick regions in a casting
to avoid shrinkage cavities.
Source: Steel Castings
Handbook, 5th ed. Steel
Founders' Society of
America, 1980. Used with
permission.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 12-6
Normal Shrinkage Allowance for Some Metals
Cast in Sand Molds
TABLE 12.1
Metal Percent
Gray cast iron
White cast iron
Malleable cast iron
Aluminum alloys
Magnesium alloys
Yellow brass
Phosphor bronze
Aluminum bronze
High-manganese steel
0.83–1.3
2.1
0.78–1.0
1.3
1.3
1.3–1.6
1.0–1.6
2.1
2.6

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 12-7
Parting Line
Figure 12.5 Redesign of a
casting by making the parting
line straight to avoid defects.
Source: Steel Casting
Handbook, 5th ed. Steel
Founders' Society of America,
1980. Used with permission.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 12-8
Casting Design
Modifications
Figure 12.6
Examples of
casting design
modifications.
Source: Steel
Casting
Handbook, 5th
ed. Steel
Founders'
Society of
America, 1980.
Used with
permission.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 12-9
Desirable and Undesirable Die-Casting
Practices
Figure 12.7 Examples of
undesirable and desirable design
practices for die-cast parts. Note
that section-thickness uniformity is
maintained throughout the part.
Source: American Die Casting
Institute.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 12-10
Mechanical Properties for Various Groups of
Cast Alloys
Figure 12.8 Mechanical properties for various groups of cast alloys. Note that gray iron has very little
ductility and toughness, compared with most other cast alloys, some of which undergo considerable
elongation and reduction of area in tension. Note also that even within the same group, the properties of
cast alloys vary over a wide range, particularly for cast steels. Source: Steel Founders' Society of
America.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 12-11
Mechanical Properties for Various Groups of
Cast Alloys (cont.)
Figure 12.8 Mechanical properties for various groups of cast alloys. Note that gray iron has very little
ductility and toughness, compared with most other cast alloys, some of which undergo considerable
elongation and reduction of area in tension. Note also that even within the same group, the properties of
cast alloys vary over a wide range, particularly for cast steels. Source: Steel Founders' Society of
America.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 12-12
Typical Applications for Casting and Casting
Characteristics
TABLE 12.2
Type of alloy Application Castability* Weldability* Machinability*
Aluminum Pistons, clutch housings, intake
manifolds
EFG–ECopper Pumps, valves, gear blanks,
marine propellers
F–G F F–G
Ductile iron Crankshafts, heavy-duty gears G D G
Gray iron Engine blocks, gears, brake disks
and drums, machine bases
ED G
Magnesium Crankcase, transmission housings G–E G E
Malleable iron Farm and construction machinery,
heavy-duty bearings, railroad
rolling stock
GD G
Nickel Gas turbine blades, pump and
valve components for chemical
plants
FF F
Steel (carbon and
low alloy)
Die blocks, heavy-duty gear
blanks, aircraft undercarriage
members, rail-road wheels
FE F
Steel (high alloy) Gas turbine housings, pump and
valve components, rock crusher
jaws
FE F
White iron Mill liners, shot blasting nozzles,
railroad brake shoes, crushers and
pulverizers
GVP VP
Zinc Door handles, radiator grills, E D E
*E, excellent; G, good; F, fair; VP, very poor; D, difficult.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 12-13
Properties and Typical Applications of Cast Irons
TABLE 12.3
Cast iron Type
Ultimate
tensile
strength
(MPa)
Yield
strength
(MPa)
Elongation
in 50 mm
(%) Typical applications
Gray Ferritic
Pearlitic
Martensitic
170
275
550
140
240
550
0.4
0.4
0
Pipe, sanitary ware
Engine blocks, machine tools
Wearing surfaces
Ductile
(Nodular)
Ferritic
Pearlitic
Tempered
martensite
415
550
825
275
380
620
18
6
2
Pipe, general service
Crankshafts, highly stressed parts
High-strength machine parts,wear-resistant
parts
Malleable Ferritic
Pearlitic
Tempered
martensite
365
450
700
240
310
550
18
10
2
Hardware, pipe fittings, general engineering
service
Railroad equipment, couplings
Railroad equipment, gears, connecting rods
White Pearlitic 275 275 0 Wear-resistant parts, mill rolls

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 12-14
Mechanical Properties of Gray Cast Irons
TABLE 12.4
ASTM
class
Ultimate
tensile
strength
(MPa)
Compressive
strength
(MPa)
Elastic
modulus
(GPa)
Hardness
(HB)
20 152 572 66 to 97 15625 179 669 79 to 102 174 30 214 752 90 to 113 210
35 252 855 100 to 119 212
40 293 965 110 to 138 235
50 362 1130 130 to 157 262
60 431 1293 141 to 162 302

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 12-15
Properties and Typical Applications of Cast
Nonferrous Alloys
TABLE 12.5
Alloys (UNS) Condition
Ultimate
tensile
strength
(MPa)
Yield
strength
(MPa)
Elongation
in 50 mm
(%) Typical applications
Aluminum alloys 195 (AO1950)
319 (AO3190)
356 (AO3560)
Heat treated
Heat treated
Heat treated
220–280
185–250
260
110–220
125–180
185
8.5–2
2–1.5
5
Sand castings
Sand castings
Permanent mold castings
Copper alloys
Red brass (C83600)
Yellow brass (C86400)
Annealed
Annealed
235
275
115
95
25
25
Pipe fittings, gears
Hardware, ornamental
Manganese bronze
(C86100)
Annealed 480 195 30 Propeller hubs, blades
Leaded tin bronze
(C92500)
Annealed 260 105 35 Gears, bearings, valves
Gun metal (C90500) Annealed 275 105 30 Pump parts, fittings
Nickel silver (C97600) Annealed 275 175 15 Marine parts, valves
Magnesium alloys
AZ91A
AZ63A
AZ91C
EZ33A
HK31A
QE22A
F
T4
T6
T5
T6
T6
230
275
275
160
210
275
150
95
130
110
105
205
3
12
5
3
8
4
Die castings
Sand and permanent mold
castings
High strength
Elevated temperature
Elevated temperature
Highest strength

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 12-16
General Cost Characteristics of Casting
Processes
TABLE 12.6
Cost*
Process Die Equi pment Labor
Production
rate (Pc/hr)Sand L L L–M <20Shell-mold L–M M-H L–M <50 Plaster L–M M M–H <10
Investment M–H L-M H < 1000
Permanent mold M M L–M <60
Die H H L–M <200
Centrifugal M H L–M <50
* L, low; M, medium; H, high.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 13-1
CHAPTER 13
Rolling of Metals

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 13-2
Flat- and Shape-Rolling Processes
Figure 13.1 Schematic
outline of various flat- and
shape-rolling processes.
Source: American Iron and
Steel Institute.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 13-3
Flat-Rolling
Figure 13.2 (a) Schematic illustration of the flat-rolling process. (b) Friction forces acting on strip surfaces.
(c) The roll force, F, and the torque acting on the rolls. The width w of the strip usually increases during
rolling, as is shown in Fig. 13.5.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 13-4
Four-High Rolling Mill
Figure 13.3 Schematic
illustration of a four-high
rolling-mill stand, showing its
various features. The
stiffnesses of the housing, the
rolls, and the roll bearings are
all important in controlling
and maintaining the thickness
of the rolled strip.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 13-5
Roll Bending
Figure 13.4 (a) Bending of
straight cylindrical rolls, caused
by the roll force. (b) Bending
of rolls ground with camber,
producing a strip with uniform
thickness.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 13-6
Spreading of a Strip
Figure 13.5 Increase in the width
(spreading) of a strip in flat rolling
(see also Fig. 13.2a). Similarly,
spreading can be observed when
dough is rolled with a rolling pin.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 13-7
Grain Structure During Hot Rolling
Figure 13.6 Changes in the grain structure of cast or of large-grain wrought metals during hot rolling. Hot
rolling is an effective way to reduce grain size in metals, for improved strength and ductility. Cast structures
of ingots or continuous casting are converted to a wrought structure by hot working.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 13-8
Roller Leveling and Defects in Flat RollingFigure 13.8 Schematic
illustration of typical defects in
flat rolling: (a) wavy edges; (b)
zipper cracks in the center of the
strip; (c) edge cracks; and (d)
alligatoring.
Figure 13.7 A method of roller leveling to
flatten rolled sheets. See also Fig 15.22.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 13-9
Residual Stresses in Rolling
Figure 13.9 (a) Residual stresses developed in rolling with small rolls or at small
reductions in thickness per pass. (b) Residual stresses developed in rolling with
large rolls or at high reductions per pass. Note the reversal of the residual stress
patterns.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 13-10
Rolling Mill
Figure 13.10 A general
view of a rolling mill.
Source: Inland Steel.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 13-11
Backing Roll Arrangements
Figure 13.11 Schematic illustration of various roll arrangements: (a) two-high; (b) three- high; (c) four-
high; (d) cluster (Sendzimir) mill.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 13-12
Tandem Rolling
Figure 13.12 A tandem rolling operation.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 13-13
Shape Rolling
Figure 13.13 Stages in the
shape rolling of an H-section
part. Various other structural
sections, such as channels and
I-beams, are also rolled by this
kind of process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 13-14
Ring-Rolling
Figure 13.14 (a) Schematic illustration of a
ring-rolling operation. Thickness reduction
results in an increase in the part diameter. (b)
Examples of cross-sections that can be formed
by ring rolling.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 13-15
Thread-
Rolling
Figure 13.16 (a) Features of a
machined or rolled thread. (b)
Grain flow in machined and
rolled threads. Unlike
machining, which cuts through
the grains of the metal, the
rolling of threads causes
improved strength, because of
cold working and favorable grain
flow.
Figure 13.15
Thread-rolling
processes: (a)
and (c)
reciprocating flat
dies; (b) two-
roller dies.
Threaded
fasteners, such as
bolts, are made
economically by
these processes,
at high rates of
production.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 13-16
Mannesmann Process
Figure 13.17 Cavity formation in a solid round bar and its utilization in the rotary tube piercing process
for making seamless pipe and tubing. (The Mannesmann mill was developed in the 1880s.)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 13-17
Tube-Rolling
Figure 13.18
Schematic illustration
of various tube-rolling
processes: (a) with
fixed mandrel; (b)
with moving mandrel;
(c) without mandrel;
and (d) pilger rolling
over a mandrel and a
pair of shaped rolls.
Tube diameters and
thicknesses can also
be changed by other
processes, such as
drawing, extrusion,
and spinning.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 13-18
Spray Casting (Osprey Process)
Figure 13.19 Spray casting
(Osprey process), in which
molten metal is sprayed over
a rotating mandrel to produce
seamless tubing and pipe.
Source: J. Szekely, Scientific
American, July 1987.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-1
CHAPTER 14
Forging of Metals

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-2
Forging
(a)
(b)Figure 14.1 (a) Schematic illustration of the steps
involved in forging a bevel gear with a shaft. Source:
Forging Industry Association. (b) Landing-gear
components for the C5A and C5B transport aircraft,
made by forging. Source: Wyman-Gordon Company.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-3
Figure 14.1 (c) general view of a 445 MN (50,000
ton) hydraulic press. Source: Wyman-Gordon
Company.
(c)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-4
Outline of Forging and Related Operations
Figure 14.2

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-5
Grain Flow Comparison
Figure 14.3 A part made by three different processes, showing grain flow. (a) casting, (b) machining,
(c) forging. Source: Forging Industry Association.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-6
Characteristics of Forging Processes
TABLE 14.1
Process Advantages Limitations
Open die Simple, inexpensive dies; useful for small
quantities; wide range of sizes available;
good strength characteristics
Limited to simple shapes; difficult to hold close
tolerances; machining to final shape necessary;
low production rate; relatively poor utilization of
material; high degree of skill required
Closed die Relatively good utilization of material;
generally better properties than open-die
forgings; good dimensional accuracy; high
production rates; good reproducibility
High die cost for small quantities; machining
often necessary
Blocker type Low die costs; high production rates Machining to final shape necessary; thick webs
and large fillets necessary
Conventional type Requires much less machining than blocker
type; high production rates; good utilization
of material
Somewhat higher die cost than blocker type
Precision type Close tolerances; machining often
unnecessary; very good material utilization;
very thin webs and flanges possible
Requires high forces, intricate dies, and provision
for removing forging from dies

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-7
Upsetting
Figure 14.4 (a) Solid cylindrical billet upset between two flat dies. (b) Uniform deformation of the billet
without friction. (c) Deformation with friction. Note barreling of the billet caused by friction forces at
the billet-die interfaces.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-8
Cogging
Figure 14.5 Two
views of a cogging
operation on a
rectangular bar.
Blacksmiths use this
process to reduce the
thickness of bars by
hammering the part
on an anvil. Note the
barreling of the
workpiece.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-9
Impression-Die Forging
Figure 14.6 Stages in impression-die forging of a solid round billet. Note the formation of flash,
which is excess metal that is subsequently trimmed off (see Fig. 14.8).

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-10
Forging a Connecting Rod
Figure 14.7 (a) Stages in
forging a connecting rod for an
internal combustion engine.
Note the amount of flash
required to ensure proper filling
of the die cavities. (b)
Fullering, and (c) edging
operations to distribute the
material when preshaping the
blank for forging.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-11
Trimming Flash from a Forged Part
Figure 14.8 Trimming flash from a
forged part. Note that the thin
material at the center is removed
by punching.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-12
Comparison of Forging With and Without Flash
Figure 14.9 Comparison of
closed-die forging to precision
or flashless forging of a
cylindrical billet. Source: H.
Takemasu, V. Vazquez, B.
Painter, and T. Altan.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-13
Coining
Figure 14.10 (a) Schematic illustration of the coining process. the earliest coins were made by open-die
forging and lacked sharp details. (b) An example of a coining operation to produce an impression of the
letter E on a block of metal.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-14
Range of k Values for Equation F=kY
fA
TABLE 14.2
Simple shapes, without flash 3–5
Simple shapes, with flash 5–8
Complex shapes, with flash 8–12

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-15
Heading/Upset Forging
Figure 14.11 (a) Heading operation, to form heads on fasteners such as nails and rivets. (b) Sequence of
operations to produce a bolt head by heading.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-16
Grain Flow Pattern of Pierced Round Billet
Figure 14.12 A pierced round billet,
showing grain flow pattern. Source:
Courtesy of Ladish Co., Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-17
Roll-Forging
Figure 14.13 Two examples of the roll-forging operation, also known as cross-rolling. Tapered leaf
springs and knives can be made by this process. Source: (a) J. Holub; (b) reprinted with permission of
General Motors Corporation.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-18
Production of Bearing Blanks
Figure 14.14 (a) Production of steel balls by the skew-rolling process. (b) Production of steel balls by
upsetting a cylindrical blank. Note the formation of flash. The balls made by these processes are
subsequently ground and polished for use in ball bearings (see Sections 25.6 and 25.10).

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-19
Orbital Forging
Figure 14.15 (a) Various movements of the upper die in orbital forging (also called
rotary, swing, or rocking-die forging); the process is similar to the action of a
mortar and pestle. (b) An example of orbital forging. Bevel gears, wheels, and
rings for bearings can be made by this process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-20
Swaging
Figure 14.16 (a)
Schematic
illustration of the
rotary-swaging
process. (b)
Forming internal
profiles on a
tubular workpiece
by swaging. (c) A
die-closing type
swaging machine,
showing forming
of a stepped shaft.
(d) Typical parts
made by swaging.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-21
Swaging of Tubes With and Without a MandrelFigure 14.17 (a) Swaging of tubes without a mandrel; not the increase in wall thickness in the die gap.
(b) Swaging with a mandrel; note that the final wall thickness of the tube depends on the mandrel
diameter. (c) Examples of cross-sections of tubes produced by swaging on shaped mandrels. Rifling
(spiral grooves) in small gun barrels can be made by this process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-22
Impression-Forging Die and Die Inserts
Figure 14.19 Die inserts used in dies for forging an
automotive axle housing. (See Tables 5.5 to 5.7 for die
materials.) Source: Metals Handbook, Desk Edition.
ASM International, Metals Park, Ohio, 1985. Used with
permission.
Figure 14.18 Standard terminology for various
features of a typical impression-forging die.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-23
Classification of Metals in Decreasing Order of
Forgeablilty
TABLE 14.3
Metal or alloy Approximate range of hot
forging temperature (°C)
Aluminum alloys
Magnesium alloys
Copper alloys
Carbon and low–alloy steels
Martensitic stainless steels
Austenitic stainless steels
Titanium alloys
Iron-base superalloys
Cobalt-base superalloys
Tantalum alloys
Molybdenum alloys
Nickel-base superalloys
Tungsten alloys
400–550
250–350
600–900
850–1150
1100–1250
1100–1250
700–950
1050–1180
1180–1250
1050–1350
1150–1350
1050–1200
1200–1300

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-24
Defects in Forged Parts
Figure 14.20 Examples of defects in forged parts. (a) Labs formed by web buckling during
forging; web thickness should be increased to avoid this problem. (b) Internal defects caused
by oversized billet; die cavities are filled prematurely, and the material at the center flows past
the filled regions as the dies close.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-25
Speed Range of Forging Equipment
TABLE 14.4
Equipment m/s
Hydraulic press
Mechanical press
Screw press
Gravity drop hammer
Power drop hammer
Counterblow hammer
0.06–0.30
0.06–1.5
0.6–1.2
3.6–4.8
3.0–9.0
4.5–9.0

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-26
Principles of Various Forging Machines
Figure 14.21 Schematic illustration of the principles of various forging machines. (a)
Hydraulic press. (b) Mechanical press with an eccentric drive; the eccentric shaft can
be replaced by a crankshaft to give the up-and-down motion to the ram. (continued)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-27
Figure 14.21 (continued) Schematic illustration of the principles of various forging
machines. (c) Knuckle-joint press. (d) Screw press. (e) Gravity drop hammer.
Principles of Various Forging Machines (cont.)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-28
Unit Cost in Forging
Figure 14.22 Typical unit
cost (cost per piece) in
forging; note how the
setup and the tooling costs
per piece decrease as the
number of pieces forged
increases, if all pieces use
the same die.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 14-29
Relative Unit Costs of a Small Connecting RodFigure 14.23 Relative unit costs
of a small connecting rod made by
various forging and casting
processes. Note that, for large
quantities, forging is more
economical. Sand casting is the
more economical process for
fewer than about 20,000 pieces.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-1
CHAPTER 15
Extrusion and Drawing of Metals

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-2
Direct Extrusion
Figure 15.1 Schematic illustration of the direct extrusion process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-3
Extrusions
Figure 15.2 Extrusions, and examples of
products made by sectioning off
extrusions. Source: Kaiser Aluminum.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-4
Types of Extrusion
Figure 15.3 Types of extrusion: (a) indirect; (b) hydrostatic; (c) lateral.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-5
Process Variables in Direct Extrusion
Figure 15.4 Process
variables in direct extrusion.
The die angle, reduction in
cross-section, extrusion
speed, billet temperature, and
lubrication all affect the
extrusion pressure.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-6
Circumscribing-Circle Diameter
Figure 15.5 Method of determining the circumscribing-circle diameter
(CCD) of an extruded cross-section.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-7
Extrusion Constant k for Various Metals
Figure 15.6 Extrusion constant
k for various metals at different
temperatures. Source: P.
Loewenstein.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-8
Types of Metal Flow in Extruding With Square
Dies
Figure 15.7 Types of metal flow in extruding with square dies. (a) Flow pattern obtained at low
friction, or in indirect extrusion. (b) Pattern obtained with high friction at the billet-chamber interfaces.
(c) Pattern obtained at high friction, or with cooling of the outer regions of the billet in the chamber.
This type of pattern, observed in metals whose strength increases rapidly with decreasing temperature,
leads to a defect known as pipe, or extrusion defect.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-9
Extrusion Temperature Ranges for Various
Metals
ϒ
C
Lead 200–250Aluminum and its alloys 375–475
Copper and its alloys 650–975
Steels 875–1300
Refractory alloys 975–2200

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-10
Extrusion-Die Configurations
(a)
(b)
(c)
Figure 15.8 Typical extrusion-die
configurations: (a) die for nonferrous metals; (b)
die for ferrous metals; (c) die for T-shaped
extrusion, made of hot-work die steel and used
with molten glass as a lubricant. Source for (c):
Courtesy of LTV Steel Company.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-11
Components for Extruding Hollow Shapes
Figure 15.9 (a) An extruded 6063-T6 aluminum ladder lock for aluminum extension ladders. This
part is 8 mm (5/16 in.) thick and is sawed from the extrusion (see Fig. 15.2). (b)-(d) Components of
various dies for extruding intricate hollow shapes. Source: for (b)-(d): K. Laue and H. Stenger,
Extrusion--Processes, Machinery, Tooling. American Society for Metals, Metals Park, Ohio, 1981.
Used with permission.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-12
Cross-Sections to be Extruded
Figure 15.10 Poor and good
examples of cross-sections to be
extruded. Note the importance of
eliminating sharp corners and of
keeping section thicknesses
uniform. Source: J. G. Bralla
(ed.); Handbook of Product
Design for Manufacturing. New
York: McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company, 1986. Used with
permission.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-13
Examples of Cold Extrusion
Figure 15.11 Two
examples of cold
extrusion. Thin arrows
indicate the direction of
metal flow during
extrusion.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-14
Cold Extruded Spark Plug
Figure 15.12 Production steps for a cold extruded
spark plug. Source: National Machinery Company.
Figure 15.13 A cross-section of the metal part
in Fig. 15.12, showing the grain flow pattern.
Source: National Machinery Company.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-15
Impact Extrusion
Figure 15.14 Schematic
illustration of the impact-
extrusion process. The
extruded parts are stripped
by the use of a stripper
plate, because they tend to
stick to the punch.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-16
Examples of Impact Extrusion
Figure 15.15 (a) Two examples of products made by impact extrusion. These parts may also be made by
casting, by forging, or by machining; the choice of process depends on the dimensions and the materials
involved and on the properties desired. Economic considerations are also important in final process
selection. (b) and (c) Impact extrusion of a collapsible tube by the Hooker process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-17
Chevron Cracking
(a)
(b)
Figure 15.16 (a) Chevron cracking (central burst) in extruded round steel bars. Unless the products are
inspected, such internal defects may remain undetected, and later cause failure of the part in service. This
defect can also develop in the drawing of rod, of wire, and of tubes. (b) Schematic illustration of rigid and
plastic zones in extrusion. The tendency toward chevron cracking increases if the two plastic zones do not
meet. Note that hte plastic zone can be made larger either by decreasing the die angel or by increasing the
reduction in cross-section (or both). Source: B. Avitzur.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-18
Hydraulic-Extrusion Press
Figure 15.17 General
view of a 9-MN
(1000-ton) hydraulic-
extrusion press.
Source: Courtesy of
Jones & Laughlin
Steel Corporation.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-19
Process Variables in Wire Drawing
Figure 15.18 Process variables in wire drawing. The die angle, the reduction in cross-
sectional area per pass, the speed of drawing, the temperature, and the lubrication all
affect the drawing force, F.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-20
Examples of Tube-Drawing Operations
Figure 15.19
Examples of tube-
drawing operations,
with and without an
internal mandrel.
Note that a variety of
diameters and wall
thicknesses can be
produced from the
same initial tube stock
(which has been made
by other processes).

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-21
Die for Round Drawing
Figure 15.20 Terminology
of a typical die used for
drawing round rod or wire.
Figure 15.21 Tungsten- carbide die insert in a steel casing. Diamond
dies, used in drawing thin wire, are
encased in a similar manner.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-22
Roll Straightening
Figure 15.22 Schematic illustration of roll straightening of a drawn round rod (see also Fig. 13.7).

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-23
Cold Drawing
Figure 15.23 Cold drawing of an extruded channel on a draw bench, to reduce its cross-section.
Individual lengths of straight rod or of cross-sections are drawn by this method. Source: Courtesy of The
Babcock and Wilcox Company, Tubular Products Division.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 15-24
Multistage Wire-Drawing
Figure 15.24 Two
views of a multistage
wire-drawing machine
that is typically used in
the making of copper
wire for electrical
wiring. Source: H.
Auerswald.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-1
CHAPTER 16
Sheet-Metal Forming Processes

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-2
Outline of Sheet-Metal Forming Processes
Figure 16.1

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-3
Characteristics of Sheet-Metal Forming
Processes
TABLE 16.1
Process Characteristics
Roll forming Long parts with constant complex cross-sections; good surface finish; high production rates ; high
tooling costs.
Stretch forming Large parts with shallow contours; suitable for low-quantity production; high labor costs; tooling
and equipment costs depend on part size.
Drawing Shallow or deep parts with relatively simple shapes; high production rates; high tooling and
equipment costs.
Stamping Includes a variety of operations, such as punching, blanking, embossing, bending, flanging, and
coining; simple or complex shapes formed at high production rates; tooling and equipment costs
can be high, but labor cost is low.
Rubber forming Drawing and embossing of simple or complex shapes; sheet surface protected by rubber
membranes; flexibility of operation; low tooling costs.
Spinning Small or large axisymmetric parts; good surface finish; low tooling costs, but labor costs can be
high unless operations are automated.
Superplastic
forming
Complex shapes, fine detail and close tolerances; forming times are long, hence production rates are
low; parts not suitable for high-temperature use.
Peen forming Shallow contours on large sheets; flexibility of operation; equipment costs can be high; process is
also used for straightening parts.
Explosive
forming
Very large sheets with relatively complex shapes, although usually axisymmetric; low tooling costs,
but high labor cost; suitable for low-quantity production; long cycle times.
Magnetic-pulse
forming
Shallow forming, bulging, and embossing operations on relatively low-strength sheets; most
suitable for tubular shapes; high production rates; requires special tooling.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-4
Shearing
Figure 16.2 (a) Schematic
illustration of shearing with a
punch and die, indicating some
of the process variables.
Characteristic features of (b) a
punched hole and (c) the slug.
Note that the scales of the two
figures are different.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-5
Clearance
Figure 16.3 (a) Effect of the clearance, c, between punch and die on the deformation zone in shearing. As
the clearance increases, the material tends to be pulled into the die rather than be sheared. In practice,
clearances usually range between 2% and 10% of the thickness of the sheet. (b) Microhardness (HV)
contours for a 6.4-mm (0.25-in) thick AISI 1020 hot-rolled steel in the sheared region. Source: H. P. Weaver
and K. J. Weinmann.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-6
Shearing Operations
Figure 16.4 (a) Punching (piercing) and blanking. (b) Examples of various shearing operations on sheet
metal.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-7
Fine Blanking
(a)
(b)
Figure 16.5 (a) Comparison of sheared edges produced by conventional (left) and by fine-blanking (right)
techniques. (b) Schematic illustration of one setup for fine blanking. Source: Feintool U.S. Operations.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-8
Slitting
Figure 16.6 Slitting with rotary knives.
This process is similar to opening cans.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-9
Laser Welding
Figure 16.7 Production of an outer side panel of a car body, by laser butt-welding and stamping.
Source: After M. Geiger and T. Nakagawa.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-10
Examples of Laser Welded Parts
Figure 16.8 Examples of laser butt-welded and stamped automotive body components. Source: After
M. Geiger and T. Nakagawa.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-11
Shaving and Shear Angles
Figure 16.9 Schematic illustrations
of the shaving of a sheared edge.
(a) Shaving a sheared edge. (b)
Shearing and shaving, combined in
one stroke.
Figure 16.10
Examples of the
use of shear angles
on punches and
dies.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-12
Compound and Progressive Die
Figure 16.11 Schematic illustrations: (a)
before and (b) after blanking a common
washer in a compound die. Note the
separate movements of the die (for
blanking) and the punch (for punching the
hole in the washer). (c) Schematic
illustration of making a washer in a
progressive die. (d) Forming of the top
piece of an aerosol spray can in a
progressive die. Note that the part is
attached to the strip until the last operation
is completed.
(a) (b)
(c)
(d)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-13
Characteristics of Metals Important in Sheet
Forming
TABLE 16.2
Characteristic Importance
Elongation Determines the capability of the sheet metal to stretch without necking and failure; high
strain-hardening exponent (n)and strain-rate sensitivity exponent (m)desirable.
Yield-point elongation Observed with mild-steel sheets; also called Lueder’s bands and stretcher strains; causes
flamelike depressions on the sheet surfaces; can be eliminated by temper rolling, but
sheet must be formed within a certain time after rolling.
Anisotropy (planar) Exhibits different behavior in different planar directions; present in cold-rolled sheets
because of preferred orientation or mechanical fibering; causes earing in drawing; can be
reduced or eliminated by annealing but at lowered strength.
Anisotropy (normal) Determines thinning behavior of sheet metals during stretching; important in deep-
drawing operations.
Grain size Determines surface roughness on stretched sheet metal; the coarser the grain, the rougher
the appearance (orange peel); also affects material strength.
Residual stresses Caused by nonuniform deformation during forming; causes part distortion when sectioned
and can lead to stress-corrosion cracking; reduced or eliminated by stress relieving.
Springback Caused by elastic recovery of the plastically deformed sheet after unloading; causes
distortion of part and loss of dimensional accuracy; can be controlled by techniques such
as overbending and bottoming of the punch.
Wrinkling Caused by compressive str esses in the plane of the sheet; can be objectionable or can be
useful in imparting stiffness to parts; can be controlled by proper tool and die design.
Quality of sheared edges Depends on process used; edges can be rough, not square, and contain cracks, residual
stresses, and a work-hardened layer, which are all detrimental to the formability of the
sheet; quality can be improved by control of clearance, tool and die design, fine blanking,
shaving, and lubrication.
Surface condition of sheet Depends on rolling practice; important in sheet forming as it can cause tearing and poor
surface quality; see also Section 13.3.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-14
Yield-Point Elongation
Figure 16.12 (a) Yield-point elongation in a sheet-metal specimen. (b) Lueder's bands in a low-carbon steel sheet.
Source: Courtesy of Caterpillar Inc. (c) Stretcher strains at the bottom of a steel can for household products.
(a)
(b)
(c)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-15
Erichsen and Bulge-Tests
Figure 16.13 (a) A cupping test (the Erichsen test) to
determine the formability of sheet metals. (b) Bulge-test
results on steel sheets of various widths. The specimen
farthest left is subjected to, basically, simple tension. The
specimen farthest right is subjected to equal biaxial
stretching. Source: Inland Steel Company.
(a)
(b)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-16
Major and Minor Strain
Figure 16.14 (a) Strains in deformed circular grid
patterns. (b) Forming-limit diagrams (FLD) for
various sheet metals. Although the major strain is
always positive (stretching), the minor strain may
be either positive or negative. In the lower left of
the diagram, R is the normal anisotropy of the
sheet, as described in Section 16.9.2. Source: S. S.
Hecker and A. K. Ghosh.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-17
Tearing and Bending
Figure 16.15 The deformation of the grid pattern and the
tearing of sheet metal during forming. The major and
minor axes of the circles are used to determine the
coordinates on the forming-limit diagram in Fig. 16.14b.
Source: S. P. Keeler.
Figure 16.16 Bending terminology. Note that the
bend radius is measured to the inner surface of the
bent part.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-18
Bending
Figure 16.17 (a) and (b) The effect of elongated
inclusions (stringers) on cracking, as a function of the
direction of bending with respect to the original rolling
direction of the sheet. (c) Cracks on the outer surface of
an aluminum strip bent to an angle of 90o. Note the
narrowing of the tope surface due to the Poisson effect.
(a) (b)(c)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-19
Minimum Bend Radius for Various Materials at
Room Temperature
TABLE 16.3
Condition
Material Soft Hard
Aluminum alloys
Beryllium copper
Brass, low-leaded
Magnesium
Steels
Austenitic stainless
Low-carbon, low-alloy, and HSLA
Titanium
Titanium alloys
0
0
0
5T
0.5T
0.5T
0.7T
2.6T
6T
4T
2T
13T
6T
4T
3T
4T

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-20
R/T Ratio versus % Area Reduction
Figure 16.18 Relationship between R/T
ratio and tensile reduction of area for
sheet metals. Note that sheet metal with
a 50% tensile reduction of area can be
bent over itself, in a process like the
folding of a piece of paper, without
cracking. Source: After J. Datsko and C.
T. Yang.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-21
Springback
Figure 16.19 Springback in bending.
The part tends to recover elastically
after ending, and its bend radius
becomes larger. Under certain
conditions, it is possible for the final
bend angle to be smaller than the
original angle (negative springback).
Figure 16.20 Methods
of reducing or
eliminating springback
in bending operations.
Source: V. Cupka, T.
Nakagawa, and H.
Tyamoto.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-22
Bending Operations
Figure 16.21 Common die-bending
operations, showing the die-opening
dimension, W, used in calculating
bending forces.
Figure 16.22 Examples of various bending operations.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-23
Bending in a Press Brake
Figure 16.23 (a) through (e) Schematic illustrations of various bending operations in
a press brake. (f) Schematic illustration of a press brake. Source: Verson Allsteel
Company.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-24
Bead Forming
Figure 16.24 (a) Bead forming with a single die. (b) Bead forming with two dies, in a press brake.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-25
Flanging
Figure 16.25 Various flanging
operations. (a) Flanges on a
flat sheet. (b) Dimpling. (c)
The piercing of sheet metal to
form a flange. In this
operation, a hole does not have
to be prepunched before the
bunch descends. Note,
however, the rough edges
along the circumference of the
flange. (d) The flanging of a
tube; note the thinning of the
edges of the flange.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-26
Roll Forming
Figure 16.26 Schematic
illustration of the roll-forming
process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-27
Tube Bending
Figure 16.27 Methods of bending tubes. Internal mandrels, or the filling of tubes with particulate
materials such as sand, are often necessary to prevent collapse of the tubes during bending. Solid
rods and structural shapes can also be bent by these techniques.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-28
Bulging
Figure 16.28 (a) The bulging of a tubular part with a flexible plug. Water pitchers can be
made by this method. (b) Production of fittings for plumbing, by expanding tubular blanks
under internal pressure. The bottomof the piece is then punched out to produce a "T."
Source: J. A. Schey, Introduction to Manufacturing Processes (2d ed.) New York: McGraw-
Hill Publishing Company, 1987.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-29
Manufacturing of Bellows
Figure 16.29 Steps in manufacturing a bellows.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-30
Stretch Forming
Figure 16.30 Schematic illustration of a stretch-forming process. Aluminum skins for
aircraft can be made by this method. Source: Cyril Bath Co.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-31
Steps in
Manufacturing
an Aluminum
Can
Figure 16.31 The metal-
forming
processes
involved in
manufacturing
a two-piece
aluminum
beverage can

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-32
Deep Drawing
Figure 16.32 (a) Schematic illustration of the deep-drawing process on a circular sheet-metal blank. The
stripper ring facilitates the removal of the formed cup from the punch. (b) Process variables in deep drawing.
Except for the punch force, F, all the parameters indicated in the figure are independent variables.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-33
Anisotropy
Figure 16.33 Strains on a tensile-test specimen
removed from a piece of sheet metal. These
strains are used in determining the normal and
planar anisotropy of the sheet metal.
Figure 16.34 The relationship between
average normal anisotropy and the
limiting drawing ratio for various sheet
metals. Source: M. Atkinson.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-34
Typical Range of Average Normal Anisotropy,
R, for Various Sheet Metals
TABLE 16.4
Zinc alloys
Hot-rolled steel
Cold-rolled rimmed steel
Cold-rolled aluminum-killed steel
Aluminum alloys
Copper and brass
Titanium alloys (a)
Stainless steels
High-strength low-alloy steels
0.4–0.6
0.8–1.0
1.0–1.4
1.4–1.8
0.6–0.8
0.6–0.9
3.0–5.0
0.9–1.2
0.9–1.2

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-35
Earing
Figure 16.45 Earing in a drawn
steel cup, caused by the planar
anisotropy of the sheet metal.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-36
Drawbeads
Figure 16.36 (a) Schematic illustration of a draw bead. (b) Metal flow during the drawing of a box-
shaped part, while using beads to control the movement of the material. (c) Deformation of circular
grids in the flange in deep drawing.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-37
Embossing
Figure 16.37 An embossing
operation with two dies.
Letters, numbers, and
designs on sheet-metal parts
and thin ash trays can be
produced by this process.
Figure 16.38 Examples of the bending and the embossing of sheet metal with a
metal punch and with a flexible pad serving as the female die. Source: Polyurethane
Products Corporation.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-38
Hydroform Process
Figure 16.39 The hydroform (or fluid forming) process. Note that, in contrast to the ordinary deep-drawing
process, the pressure in the dome forces the cup walls against the punch. The cup travels with the punch; in this
way, deep drawability is improved.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-39
Conventional Spinning
Figure 16.40 (a) Schematic illustration of the conventional spinning process. (b) Types of parts
conventionally spun. All parts are axisymmetric.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-40
Shear and
Tube Spinning
Figure 16.41 (a) Schematic
illustration of the shear
spinning process for
making conical parts. The
mandrel can be shaped so
that curvilinear parts can be
spun. (b) Schematic
illustration of the tube
spinning process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-41
Spinning of a Compressor Shaft
Figure 16.42 Steps in
tube and shear spinning of
a compressor shaft for the
Olympus jet engine of the
supersonic Concorde
aircraft.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-42
Diffusion Bonding and Superplastic Forming
Figure 16.43 Types of
structures made by
diffusion bonding and
superplastic forming of
sheet metal. Such
structures have a high
stiffness-to-weight ratio.
Source: Rockwell
International Corp.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-43
Explosive Forming
Figure 16.44 (a) Schematic illustration of the explosive forming process. (b) Illustration of the confined
method of explosive bulging of tubes.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-44
Magnetic-Pulse Forming
Figure 16.45 (a) Schematic illustration of the magnetic-pulse forming process used to form a
tube over a plug. (b) Aluminum tube collapsed over a hexagonal plug by the magnetic-pulse
forming process.
(a)
(b)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-45
Honeycomb Structures
Figure 16.46 Methods of manufacturing honeycomb
structures: (a) Expansion process; (b) Corrugation
process; (c) Assembling a honeycomb structure into
a laminate.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-46
Stamping
Press and
Press
Frames
Figure 16.47 (a)
and (b) Schematic
illustration of
types of press
frames for sheet-
forming
operations. Each
type has its own
characteristics of
stiffness, capacity,
and accessibility.
Source: Engineer's
Handbook, VEB
Fachbuchverlag,
1965. (c) A large
stamping press.
Source: Verson
Allsteel Company.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 16-47
Cost Comparison for Spinning and Deep
Drawing
Figure 16.48 Cost comparison
for manufacturing a round
sheet-metal container either by
conventional spinning or by
deep drawing. Note that for
small quantities, spinning is
more economical.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-1
CHAPTER 17
Processing of Powder Metals, Ceramics,
Glass, and Superconductors

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-2
Typical Applications for Metal Powders
TABLE 17.1
Application Metals Uses
Abrasives
Aerospace
Automotive
Electrical/electronic
Heat treating
Joining
Lubrication
Magnetic
Manufacturing
Medical/dental
Metallurgical
Nuclear
Office equipment
Fe, Sn, Zn
Al, Be, Nb
Cu, Fe, W
Ag, Au, Mo
Mo, Pt, W
Cu, Fe, Sn
Cu, Fe, Zn
Co, Fe, Ni
Cu, Mn, W
Ag, Au, W
Al, Ce, Si
Be, Ni, W
Al, Fe, Ti
Cleaning, abrasive wheels
Jet engines, heat shields
Valve inserts, bushings, gears
Contacts, diode heat sinks
Furnace elements, thermocouples
Solders, electrodes
Greases, abradable seals
Relays, magnets
Dies, tools, bearings
Implants, amalgams
Metal recovery, alloying
Shielding, filters, reflectors
Electrostatic copiers, camsSource: R. M. German.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-3
Powder-Metallurgy
Figure 17.1 (a) Examples of typical parts made by
powder-metallurgy processes. (b) Upper trip lever
for a commercial irrigation sprinkler, made by P/M.
This part is made of unleaded brass alloy; it
replaces a die-cast part, with a 60% savings.
Source: Reproduced with permission from Success
Stories on P/M Parts, 1998. Metal Powder
Industries Federation, Princeton, New Jersey, 1998.
(c) Main-bearing powder metal caps for 3.8 and 3.1
liter General Motors automotive engines. Source:
Courtesy of Zenith Sintered Products, Inc.,
Milwaukee, Wisconsin.
(a)(b)
(c)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-4
Making Powder-Metallurgy Parts
Figure 17.2 Outline of processes and operations involved in making powder-metallurgy parts.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-5
Particle Shapes in Metal Powders
Figure 17.3
Particle shapes in
metal powders, and
the processes by
which they are
produced. Iron
powders are
produced by many
of these processes.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-6
Powder Particles
Figure 17.4 (a) Scanning-electron-microscopy photograph of iron-powder particles made by atomization.
(b) Nickel-based superalloy (Udimet 700) powder particles made by the rotating electrode process; see Fig.
17.5b. Source: Courtesy of P. G. Nash, Illinois Institute of Technology, Chicago.
(a)
(b)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-7
Atomization and Mechanical Comminution
Figure 17.5 Methods of metal-
powder production by atomization;
(a) melt atomization; (b)
atomization with a rotating
consumable electrode.
Figure 17.6 Methods of mechanical
comminution, to obtain fine
particles: (a) roll crushing, (b) ball
mill, and (c) hammer milling.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-8
Geometries of Powders
Figure 17.7 Some common
equipment geometries for mixing
or blending powders: (a)
cylindrical, (b) rotating cube, (c)
double cone, and (d) twin shell.
Source: Reprinted with
permission from R. M. German,
Powder Metallurgy Science.
Princeton, NJ; Metal Powder
Industries Federation, 1984.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-9
Compaction
Figure 17.8 (a) Compaction of
metal powder to form a bushing.
The pressed powder part is called
green compact. (b) Typical tool
and die set for compacting a spur
gear. Source: Metal Powder
Industries Federation.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-10
Density Effects
Figure 17.9 (a) Density of copper- and iron-powder compacts as a function of compacting pressure. Density
greatly influences the mechanical and physical properties of P/M parts. Source: F. V. Lenel, Powder Metallurgy:
Principles and Applications. Princeton, NJ; Metal Powder Industries Federation, 1980. (b) Effects of density on
tensile strength, elongation, and electrical conductivity of copper powder. IACS means International Annealed
Copper Standard for electrical conductivity.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-11
Density Variations in Dies
Figure 17.10 Density variation in compacting metal powders in various dies: (a) and (c) single-action press;
(b) and (d) double-action press. Note in (d) the greater uniformity of density, from pressing with two
punches with separate movements, compared with (c). (e) Pressure contours in compacted copper powder in
a single-action press. Source: P. Duwez and L. Zwell.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-12
Compacting Pressures for Various Metal
Powders
TABLE 17.2
Metal
Pressure
(MPa)
Aluminum
Brass
Bronze
Iron
Tantalum
Tungsten
70–275
400–700
200–275
350–800
70–140
70–140
Other materialsAluminum oxide Carbon
Cemented carbides
Ferrites
110–140
140–165
140–400
110–165

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-13
Mechanical Press
Figure 17.11 A 7.3 MN
(825 ton) mechanical
press for compacting
metal powder. Source:
Courtesy of Cincinnati
Incorporated.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-14
Hot and Cold Isostatic Pressing
Figure 17.12 Schematic diagram of cold isostatic pressing, as applied
to forming a tube. The powder is enclosed in a flexible container
around a solid core rod. Pressure is applied isostatically to the
assembly inside a high-pressure chamber. Source: Reprinted with
permission from R.M. German, Powder Metallurgy Science.
Princeton, NJ; Metal Powder Industries Federation, 1984.
Figure 17.14 Schematic illustration of
hot isostatic pressing. The pressure and
temperature variation vs. time are
shown in the diagram. Source:
Preprinted with permission from R.M.
German, Powder Metallurgy Science.
Princeton, NJ; Metal Powder Industries
Federation, 1984.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-15
Capabilities Available from P/M Operations
Figure 17.13 Capabilities,
with respect to part size and
shape complexity, available
from various P/M
operations. P/F means
powder forging. Source:
Metal Powder Industries
Federation.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-16
Powder Rolling
Figure 17.15 An example of
powder rolling. Source:
Metals Handbook (9th ed.),
Vol. 7. American Society for
Metals.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-17
Sintering Temperature and Time for Various
Metals
TABLE 17.3
Material
Temperature
(° C)
Time
(Min)
Copper, brass, and bronze
Iron and iron-graphite
Nickel
Stainless steels
Alnico alloys
(for permanent magnets)
Ferrites
Tungsten carbide
Molybdenum
Tungsten
Tantalum
760–900
1000–1150
1000–1150
1100–1290
1200–1300
1200–1500
1430–1500
2050
2350
2400
10–45
8–45
30–45
30–60
120–150
10–600
20–30
120
480
480

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-18
Sintering
Figure 17.16 Schematic illustration of two mechanisms for sintering metal powders: (a) solid-state
material transport; (b) liquid-phase material transport. R = particle radius, r = neck radius, and
ρ = neck profile radius.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-19
Mechanical Properties of Selected P/M
Materials
TABLE 17.4
Designation
MPIF
type Condition
Ultimate
tensile
strength
(MPa)
Yield
Strength
(MPa) Hardness
Elongation
in 25 mm
(%)
Elastic
modulus
(GPa)
Ferrous FC-0208 N AS 225 205 45 HRB <0.5 70
HT 295 — 95 HRB <0.5 70
R AS 415 330 70 HRB 1 110
HT 550 — 35 HRC <0.5 110
S AS 550 395 80 HRB 1.5 130
HT 690 655 40 HRC <0.5 130
FN-0405 S AS 425 240 72 HRB 4.5 145
HT 1060 880 39 HRC 1 145
T AS 510 295 80 HRB 6 160
HT 1240 1060 44 HRC 1.5 160
Aluminum
601 AB, pressed bar AS 110 48 60 HRH 6 —
HT 252 241 75 HRH 2 —
Brass
CZP-0220 T — 165 76 55 HRH 13 —
U — 193 89 68 HRH 19 —
W — 221 103 75 HRH 23 —
Titanium
Ti-6AI-4V HIP 917 827 — 13 —
Superalloys
Stellite 19 — 1035 — 49 HRC <1 —
MPIF: Metal Powder Industries Federation. AS: as sintered, HT: heat treated, HIP: hot isostatically pressed.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-20
Mechanical Property Comparison for Ti-6Al-4V
TABLE 17.5
Process(*)
Density
(%)
Yield
strength
(MPa)
Ultimate
strength
(MPa)
Elongation
(%)
Reduction
of area
(%)
Cast Cast and forged
Blended elemental (P+S)
Blended elemental (HIP)
Prealloyed (HIP)
100
100
98
> 99
100
840
875
786
805
880
930
965
875
875
975
7
14 40
8
9
14
15
14
17
26
(*) P+S = pressed and sintered, HIP = hot isostatically pressed.
Source: R.M. German.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-21
Examples
of P/M
Parts
Figure 17.17 Examples of P/M parts, showing
poor designs and good
ones. Note that sharp
radii and reentry corners
should be avoided and
that threads and
transverse holes have to
be produced separately
by additional machining
operations.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-22
Forged and P/M Titanium Parts and Potential
Cost Saving
TABLE 17.6
Weight (kg)
Potential
cost
Part
Forged
billet P/M
Final
part
saving
(%)F-14 Fuselage brace F-18 Engine mount support
F-18 Arrestor hook support fitting
F-14 Nacelle frame
2.8
7.7
79.4
143
1.1
2.5
25.0
82
0.8
0.5
12.9
24.2
50
20
25
50

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-23
Characteristics of Ceramics Processing
TABLE 17.7
Process Advantages Limitations
Slip casting Large parts, complex shapes; low
equipment cost.
Low production rate; limited dimensional
accuracy.
Extrusion Hollow shapes and small diameters;
high production rate.
Parts have constant cross section; limited
thickness.
Dry pressing Close tolerances; high production rate
with automation.
Density variation in parts with high length-to-
diameter ratios; dies require high abrasive-wear
resistance; equipment can be costly.
Wet pressing Complex shapes; high production rate.Part size limited; limited dimensional accuracy;
tooling costs can be high.
Hot pressing Strong, high-density parts.Protective atmospheres required; die life can be
short.
Isostatic pressing Uniform density distribution.Equipment can be costly.
Jiggering High production rate with automation;
low tooling cost.
Limited to axisymmetric parts; limited
dimensional accuracy.
Injection molding Complex shapes; high production rate.Tooling can be costly.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-24
Steps in Making Ceramic Parts
Figure 17.18 Processing steps involved in making ceramic parts.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-25
Slip-Casting
Figure 17.19 Sequence of operations in slip-casting a ceramic part. After the slip
has been poured, the part is dried and fired in an oven to give it strength and
hardness. Source: F. H. Norton, Elements of Ceramics. Addison-Wesley
Publishing Company, Inc. 1974.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-26
Extruding and Jiggering
Figure 17.20 (a) Extruding and (b) jiggering operations. Source: R. F. Stoops.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-27
Shrinkage
Figure 17.21 Shrinkage of wet clay caused by removal of water during drying. Shrinkage
may be as much as 20% by volume. Source: F. H. Norton, Elements of Ceramics. Addison-
Wesley Publishing Company, Inc. 1974.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-28
Sheet Glass Formation
Figure 17.22 (a)
Continuous process for
drawing sheet glass
from a molten bath.
Source: W. D. Kingery,
Introduction to
Ceramics. Wiley,
1976. (b) Rolling glass
to produce flat sheet.
Figure 17.23 The float method
of forming sheet glass. Source:
Corning Glass Works.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-29
Glass Tubing
Figure 17.24 Manufacturing
process for glass tubing. Air is
blown through the mandrel to
keep the tube from collapsing.
Source: Corning Glass Works.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-30
Steps in
Manufacturing
a Glass Bottle
Figure 17.25
Stages in
manufacturing an
ordinary glass
bottle. Source:
F.H. Norton,
Elements of
Ceramics.
Addison-Wesley
Publishing
Company, Inc.
1974.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-31
Glass Molding
Figure 17.26
Manufacturing a
glass item by
pressing glass in a
mold. Source:
Corning Glass
Works.
Figure 17.27 Pressing
glass in a split mold.
Source: E.B. Shand,
Glass Engineering
Handbook. McGraw-
Hill, 1958.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-32
Centrifugal Glass Casting
Figure 17.28 Centrifugal casting of glass.
Television-tube funnels are made by this
process. Source: Corning Glass Works.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 17-33
Residual Stresses
Figure 17.29 Residual stresses in tempered glass plate, and stages involved in inducing
compressive surface residual stresses for improved strength.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-1
CHAPTER 18
Forming and Shaping Plastics and
Composite Materials

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-2
Characteristics of Forming and Shaping
Processes for Plastics and Composite Materials
TABLE 18.1
Process Characteristics
Extrusion Long, uniform, solid or hollow complex cross-sections; high production rates;
low tooling costs; wide tolerances.
Injection molding Complex shapes of various sizes, eliminating assembly; high production rates;
costly tooling; good dimensional accuracy.
Structural foam molding Large parts with high stiffness-to-weight ratio; less expensive tooling than in
injection molding; low production rates.
Blow molding Hollow thin-walled parts of various sizes; high production rates and low cost for
making containers.
Rotational molding Large hollow shapes of relatively simple shape; low tooling cost; low production
rates.
Thermoforming Shallow or relatively deep cavities; low tooling costs; medium production rates.
Compression molding Parts similar to impression-die forging; relatively inexpensive tooling; medium
production rates.
Transfer molding More complex parts than compression molding and higher production rates; some
scrap loss; medium tooling cost.
Casting Simple or intricate shapes made with flexible molds; low production rates.
Processing of composite materials Long cycle times; tolerances and tooling cost depend on process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-3
Forming
and
Shaping
Processes
Figure 18.1 Outline of forming and shaping processes for plastics, elastomers, and
composite materials. (TP, Thermoplastic; TS, Thermoset; E, Elastomer.)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-4
Extruder
Figure 18.2 Schematic illustration of a typical extruder. Source: Encyclopedia of Polymer Science
and Engineering (2nd ed.). Copyright © 1985. Reprinted by permission of John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-5
Sheet and Film Extrusion
Figure 18.3 Die geometry (coat-hanger die) for extruding sheet.
Source: Encyclopedia of Polymer Science and Engineering (2d ed.).
Copyright © 1985. Reprinted by permission of John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
Figure 18.4 Schematic illustration of the production of thin film and
plastic bags from tube first produced by an extruder and then blown by
air. Source: D.C. Miles and J.H. Briston, Polymer Technology, 1979.
Reproduced by permission of Chemical Publishing Co., Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-6
Injection Molding
(c)
Figure 18.5 Injection molding with (a) plunger, (b) reciprocating rotating screw, (c) a typical part made from an
injection molding machine cavity, showing a number of parts made from one shot; note also mold features such as
sprues, runners, and gates.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-7
Examples of Injection Molding
Figure 18.6 Typical products made by
injection molding, including examples
of insert molding. Source: Plainfield
Molding Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-8
Injection-Molding Machine
Figure 18.7 A 2.2-MN (250-ton) injection-molding machine. The tonnage is the force
applied to keep the dies closed during injection of molten plastic into the mold cavities.
Source: Courtesy of Cincinnati Milacron, Plastics Machinery Division.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-9
Reaction-Injection Molding
Figure 18.8 Schematic
illustration of the
reaction-injection
molding process.
Source: Modern Plastics
Encyclopedia.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-10
Blow
Molding
Figure 18.9 Schematic illustrations of (a) the blow-molding process for making
plastic beverage bottles, and (b) a three-station injection blow-molding machine.
Source: Encyclopedia of Polymer Science and Engineering (2d ed.). Copyright
©1985. Reprinted by permission of John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-11
Rotational Molding
Figure 18.10 The
rotational molding
(rotomolding or
rotocasting) process.
Trash cans, buckets, and
plastic footballs can be
made by this process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-12
Thermoforming Processes
Figure 18.11 Various thermoforming processes for thermoplastic sheet. These processes are
commonly used in making advertising signs, cookie and candy trays, panels for shower stalls, and
packaging.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-13
Compression Molding
Figure 18.12 Types of compression
molding, a process similar to forging: (a)
positive, (b) semipositive, and (c) flash.
The flash in part (c) has to be trimmed off.
(d) Die design for making a compression-
molded part with undercuts.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-14
Transfer Molding
Figure 18.13 Sequence of operations in transfer molding for thermosetting plastics. This process
is particularly suitable for intricate parts with varying wall thickness.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-15
Casting, Potting and Encapsulation
Figure 18.14 Schematic
illustration of (a) casting, (b)
potting, (c) encapsulation of
plastics.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-16
Calendering and Examples of Reinforced
Plastics
Figure 18.15 Schematic illustration
of calendering. Sheets produced by
this process are subsequently used
in thermoforming.
Figure 18.16 Reinforced- plastic components for a Honda motorcycle.
The parts shown are front and rear
forks, a rear swingarm, a wheel, and
brake disks.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-17
Prepegs
Figure 18.17 (a) Manufacturing process for polymer-matrix composite. Source: T.W. Chou, R.L.
McCullough, and R.B. Pipes. (b) Boron-epoxy prepreg tape. Source: Avco Specialty
Materials/Textron.
(b)
(a)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-18
Tape Laying
Figure 18.18 (a) Single-ply layup of
boron-epoxy tape for the horizontal
stabilizer for F-14 fighter aircraft. Source:
Grumman Aircraft Corporation. (b) A 10
axis computer-numerical-controlled tape-
laying system. This machine is capable of
laying up 75 mm and 150 mm (3 in. and 6
in.) wide tapes, on contours of up to ±30°
and at speeds of up to 0.5 m/s (1.7 ft/s).
Source: Courtesy of The Ingersoll Milling
Machine Company.
(a)(b)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-19
Sheet Molding
Figure 18.19 The manufacturing
process for producing reinforced-
plastic sheets. The sheet is still
viscous at this stage; it can later be
shaped into various products. Source:
T. W. Chou, R. L. McCullough, and R.
B. Pipes.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-20
Examples of Molding Processes
Figure 18.20 (a) Vacuum-bag forming. (b) Pressure-bag forming. Source: T. H. Meister.
Figure 18.21 Manual
methods of processing
reinforced plastics: (a)
hand lay-up and (b)
spray-up. These
methods are also
called open-mold
processing.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-21
Filament Winding
(b)
(a)
Figure 18.22 (a) Schematic illustration of the filament-winding process. (b) Fiberglass
being wound over aluminum liners, for slide-raft inflation vessels for the Boeing 767
aircraft. Source: Brunswick Corporation, Defense Division.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-22
Pultrusion
Figure 18.23 Schematic
illustration of the pultrusion
process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-23
Design Modifications to Minimize Distortion
Figure 18.24 Examples of design
modifications to eliminate or
minimize distortion of plastic parts.
(a) Suggested design changes to
minimize distortion. Source: F.
Strasser. (b) Die design
(exaggerated) for extrusion of
square sections. Without this
design, product cross-sections
swell because of the recovery of
the material; this effect is known as
die swell. (c) Design change in a
rib, to minimize pull-in caused by
shrinkage during cooling. (d)
Stiffening the bottoms of thin
plastic containers by the bottoms of
thin plastic containers by doming-
this technique is similar to the
process used to make the bottoms
of aluminum beverage cans.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-24
Comparative Costs and Production Volumes
for Processing of Plastics
TABLE 18.2
Typical production volume, number of parts
Equipment
capital cost
Production
rate
Tooling
cost 10 10
2
10
3
10
4
10
5
10
6
10
7
Machining Medium Medium LowCompression molding High Medium HighTransfer molding High Medium HighInjection molding High High HighExtrusion Medium High Low *
Rotational molding Low Low Low
Blow molding Medium Medium MediumThermoforming Low Low LowCasting Low Very low LowForging High Low MediumFoam molding High Medium MediumSource: After R.L.E. Brown, Design and Manufacture of Plastic Parts. Copyright (c) 1980 by John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
Reprinted by permission of John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
*Continuous process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-25
Economic Production Quantities for Various
Molding Methods
TABLE 18.3
Relative investment
required Relative Economic
Molding method Equipment Tooling
production
rate
production
quantityHand lay-up
Spray-up
Casting
Vacuum-bag molding
Compression-molded BMC
SIVIC and preform
Pressure-bag molding
Centrifugal casting
Filament winding
Pultrusion
Rotational molding
Injection molding
VL
L
M
M
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
VH
L
L
L
L
VH
VH
H
H
H
H
H
VH
L
L
L
VL
H
H
L
M
L
H
L
VH
VL
L
L
VL
H
H
L
M
L
H
M
VH

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-1
CHAPTER 18
Forming and Shaping Plastics and
Composite Materials

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-2
Characteristics of Forming and Shaping
Processes for Plastics and Composite Materials
TABLE 18.1
Process Characteristics
Extrusion Long, uniform, solid or hollow complex cross-sections; high production rates;
low tooling costs; wide tolerances.
Injection molding Complex shapes of various sizes, eliminating assembly; high production rates;
costly tooling; good dimensional accuracy.
Structural foam molding Large parts with high stiffness-to-weight ratio; less expensive tooling than in
injection molding; low production rates.
Blow molding Hollow thin-walled parts of various sizes; high production rates and low cost for
making containers.
Rotational molding Large hollow shapes of relatively simple shape; low tooling cost; low production
rates.
Thermoforming Shallow or relatively deep cavities; low tooling costs; medium production rates.
Compression molding Parts similar to impression-die forging; relatively inexpensive tooling; medium
production rates.
Transfer molding More complex parts than compression molding and higher production rates; some
scrap loss; medium tooling cost.
Casting Simple or intricate shapes made with flexible molds; low production rates.
Processing of composite materials Long cycle times; tolerances and tooling cost depend on process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-3
Forming
and
Shaping
Processes
Figure 18.1 Outline of forming and shaping processes for plastics, elastomers, and
composite materials. (TP, Thermoplastic; TS, Thermoset; E, Elastomer.)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-4
Extruder
Figure 18.2 Schematic illustration of a typical extruder. Source: Encyclopedia of Polymer Science
and Engineering (2nd ed.). Copyright © 1985. Reprinted by permission of John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-5
Sheet and Film Extrusion
Figure 18.3 Die geometry (coat-hanger die) for extruding sheet.
Source: Encyclopedia of Polymer Science and Engineering (2d ed.).
Copyright © 1985. Reprinted by permission of John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
Figure 18.4 Schematic illustration of the production of thin film and
plastic bags from tube first produced by an extruder and then blown by
air. Source: D.C. Miles and J.H. Briston, Polymer Technology, 1979.
Reproduced by permission of Chemical Publishing Co., Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-6
Injection Molding
(c)
Figure 18.5 Injection molding with (a) plunger, (b) reciprocating rotating screw, (c) a typical part made from an
injection molding machine cavity, showing a number of parts made from one shot; note also mold features such as
sprues, runners, and gates.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-7
Examples of Injection Molding
Figure 18.6 Typical products made by
injection molding, including examples
of insert molding. Source: Plainfield
Molding Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-8
Injection-Molding Machine
Figure 18.7 A 2.2-MN (250-ton) injection-molding machine. The tonnage is the force
applied to keep the dies closed during injection of molten plastic into the mold cavities.
Source: Courtesy of Cincinnati Milacron, Plastics Machinery Division.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-9
Reaction-Injection Molding
Figure 18.8 Schematic
illustration of the
reaction-injection
molding process.
Source: Modern Plastics
Encyclopedia.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-10
Blow
Molding
Figure 18.9 Schematic illustrations of (a) the blow-molding process for making
plastic beverage bottles, and (b) a three-station injection blow-molding machine.
Source: Encyclopedia of Polymer Science and Engineering (2d ed.). Copyright
©1985. Reprinted by permission of John Wiley & Sons, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-11
Rotational Molding
Figure 18.10 The
rotational molding
(rotomolding or
rotocasting) process.
Trash cans, buckets, and
plastic footballs can be
made by this process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-12
Thermoforming Processes
Figure 18.11 Various thermoforming processes for thermoplastic sheet. These processes are
commonly used in making advertising signs, cookie and candy trays, panels for shower stalls, and
packaging.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-13
Compression Molding
Figure 18.12 Types of compression
molding, a process similar to forging: (a)
positive, (b) semipositive, and (c) flash.
The flash in part (c) has to be trimmed off.
(d) Die design for making a compression-
molded part with undercuts.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-14
Transfer Molding
Figure 18.13 Sequence of operations in transfer molding for thermosetting plastics. This process
is particularly suitable for intricate parts with varying wall thickness.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-15
Casting, Potting and Encapsulation
Figure 18.14 Schematic
illustration of (a) casting, (b)
potting, (c) encapsulation of
plastics.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-16
Calendering and Examples of Reinforced
Plastics
Figure 18.15 Schematic illustration
of calendering. Sheets produced by
this process are subsequently used
in thermoforming.
Figure 18.16 Reinforced- plastic components for a Honda motorcycle.
The parts shown are front and rear
forks, a rear swingarm, a wheel, and
brake disks.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-17
Prepegs
Figure 18.17 (a) Manufacturing process for polymer-matrix composite. Source: T.W. Chou, R.L.
McCullough, and R.B. Pipes. (b) Boron-epoxy prepreg tape. Source: Avco Specialty
Materials/Textron.
(b)
(a)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-18
Tape Laying
Figure 18.18 (a) Single-ply layup of
boron-epoxy tape for the horizontal
stabilizer for F-14 fighter aircraft. Source:
Grumman Aircraft Corporation. (b) A 10
axis computer-numerical-controlled tape-
laying system. This machine is capable of
laying up 75 mm and 150 mm (3 in. and 6
in.) wide tapes, on contours of up to ±30°
and at speeds of up to 0.5 m/s (1.7 ft/s).
Source: Courtesy of The Ingersoll Milling
Machine Company.
(a)(b)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-19
Sheet Molding
Figure 18.19 The manufacturing
process for producing reinforced-
plastic sheets. The sheet is still
viscous at this stage; it can later be
shaped into various products. Source:
T. W. Chou, R. L. McCullough, and R.
B. Pipes.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-20
Examples of Molding Processes
Figure 18.20 (a) Vacuum-bag forming. (b) Pressure-bag forming. Source: T. H. Meister.
Figure 18.21 Manual
methods of processing
reinforced plastics: (a)
hand lay-up and (b)
spray-up. These
methods are also
called open-mold
processing.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-21
Filament Winding
(b)
(a)
Figure 18.22 (a) Schematic illustration of the filament-winding process. (b) Fiberglass
being wound over aluminum liners, for slide-raft inflation vessels for the Boeing 767
aircraft. Source: Brunswick Corporation, Defense Division.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-22
Pultrusion
Figure 18.23 Schematic
illustration of the pultrusion
process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-23
Design Modifications to Minimize Distortion
Figure 18.24 Examples of design
modifications to eliminate or
minimize distortion of plastic parts.
(a) Suggested design changes to
minimize distortion. Source: F.
Strasser. (b) Die design
(exaggerated) for extrusion of
square sections. Without this
design, product cross-sections
swell because of the recovery of
the material; this effect is known as
die swell. (c) Design change in a
rib, to minimize pull-in caused by
shrinkage during cooling. (d)
Stiffening the bottoms of thin
plastic containers by the bottoms of
thin plastic containers by doming-
this technique is similar to the
process used to make the bottoms
of aluminum beverage cans.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-24
Comparative Costs and Production Volumes
for Processing of Plastics
TABLE 18.2
Typical production volume, number of parts
Equipment
capital cost
Production
rate
Tooling
cost 10 10
2
10
3
10
4
10
5
10
6
10
7
Machining Medium Medium LowCompression molding High Medium HighTransfer molding High Medium HighInjection molding High High HighExtrusion Medium High Low *
Rotational molding Low Low Low
Blow molding Medium Medium MediumThermoforming Low Low LowCasting Low Very low LowForging High Low MediumFoam molding High Medium MediumSource: After R.L.E. Brown, Design and Manufacture of Plastic Parts. Copyright (c) 1980 by John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
Reprinted by permission of John Wiley & Sons, Inc.
*Continuous process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 18-25
Economic Production Quantities for Various
Molding Methods
TABLE 18.3
Relative investment
required Relative Economic
Molding method Equipment Tooling
production
rate
production
quantityHand lay-up
Spray-up
Casting
Vacuum-bag molding
Compression-molded BMC
SIVIC and preform
Pressure-bag molding
Centrifugal casting
Filament winding
Pultrusion
Rotational molding
Injection molding
VL
L
M
M
H
H
H
H
H
H
H
VH
L
L
L
L
VH
VH
H
H
H
H
H
VH
L
L
L
VL
H
H
L
M
L
H
L
VH
VL
L
L
VL
H
H
L
M
L
H
M
VH

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-1
CHAPTER 20
Fundamentals of Cutting

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-2
Fundamentals of Cutting
Figure 20.1 Examples of cutting
processes.Figure 20.2 Basic principle of the turning
operations.
Figure 20.3 Schematic illustration of a two- dimensional cutting process, also called orthogonal cutting. Note that the tool shape and
its angles, depth of cut, t
o
, and the cutting speed, V,
are all independent variables.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-3
Factors Influencing Cutting Processes
TABLE 20.1
Parameter Influence and interrelationship
Cutting speed, depth of cut,
feed, cutting fluids
Forces, power, temperature rise, tool life, type of chip, surface finish.Tool angles As above; influence on chip flow direction; resistance to tool chipping.
Continuous chip Good surface finish; steady cutting forces; undesirable in automated
machinery.
Built-up edge chip Poor surface finish; thin stable edge can protect tool surfaces.
Discontinuous chip Desirable for ease of chip disposal; fluctuating cutting forces; can affect
surface finish and cause vibration and chatter.
Temperature rise Influences tool life, particularly crater wear, and dimensional accuracy of
workpiece; may cause thermal damage to workpiece surface.
Tool wear Influences surface finish, dimensional accuracy, temperature rise, forces and
power.
Machinability Related to tool life, surface finish, forces and power.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-4
Mechanics of Chip Formation
Figure 20.4 (a) Schematic illustration of the basic mechanism of chip formation
in metal cutting. (b) Velocity diagram in the cutting zone. See also Section
20.5.3. Source: M. E. Merchant.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-5
Chips and Their Photomicrographs
Figure 20.5 Basic types
of chips and their
photomicrographs
produced in metal
cutting: (a) continuous
chip with narrow,
straight primary shear
zone; (b) secondary
shear zone at the chip-
tool interface; (c)
continuous chip with
large primary shear
zone; (d) continuous
chip with built-up edge;
(e) segmented or
nonhomogeneous chip
and (f) discontinuous
chip. Source: After M.
C. Shaw, P. K. Wright,
and S. Kalpakjian.
(f)
(b)(a) (c)
(d) (e)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-6
Built-Up Edge Chips
(b)(c)
(a)
Figure 20.6 (a) Hardness distribution in the cutting zone for 3115 steel. Note that some regions in the built-up
edge are as much as three times harder than the bulk metal. (b) Surface finish in turning 5130 steel with a
built-up edge. (c) surface finish on 1018 steel in face milling. Magnifications: 15X. Source: Courtesy of
Metcut Research Associates, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-7
Chip Breakers
Figure 20.7 (a) Schematic
illustration of the action of a chip
breaker. Note that the chip
breaker decreases the radius of
curvature of the chip. (b) Chip
breaker clamped on the rake face
of a cutting tool. (c) Grooves in
cutting tools acting as chip
breakers; see also Fig. 21.2.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-8
Examples of Chips Produced in Turning
Figure 20.8 Various chips produced in turning: (a) tightly curled chip; (b) chip hits workpiece and
breaks; (c) continuous chip moving away from workpiece; and (d) chip hits tool shank and breaks off.
Source: G. Boothroyd, Fundamentals of Metal Machining and Machine Tools. Copyright ©1975;
McGraw-Hill Publishing Company. Used with permission.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-9
Cutting With an Oblique Tool
Figure 20.9 (a) Schematic illustration of cutting with an oblique tool. (b) Top view showing the
inclination angle, i. (c) Types of chips produced with different inclination.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-10
Right-Hand Cutting Tool
Figure 20.10 (a) Schematic illustration of a right-hand cutting tool. Although these
tools have traditionally been produced from solid tool-steel bars, they have been
largely replaced by carbide or other inserts of various shapes and sizes, as shown in
(b). The various angles on these tools and their effects on machining are described in
Section 22.3.1.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-11
Forces in Two-Dimensional Cutting
Figure 20.11 Forces acting on a
cutting tool in two-dimensional
cutting. Note that the resultant
force, R, must be colinear to
balance the forces.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-12
Approximate Energy Requirements in Cutting
Operations
TABLE 20.2 Approximate Energy Requirements in
Cutting Operations (at drive motor,
corrected for 80% efficiency; multiply by
1.25 for dull tools).
Specific energy
Material W-s/mm
3
hp-min/in.
3
Aluminum alloys
Cast irons
Copper alloys
High-temperature alloys
Magnesium alloys
Nickel alloys
Refractory alloys
Stainless steels
Steels
Titanium alloys
0.4–1.1
1.6–5.5
1.4–3.3
3.3–8.5
0.4–0.6
4.9–6.8
3.8–9.6
3.0–5.2
2.7–9.3
3.0–4.1
0.15–0.4
0.6–2.0
0.5–1.2
1.2–3.1
0.15–0.2
1.8–2.5
1.1–3.5
1.1–1.9
1.0–3.4
1.1–1.5

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-13
Temperature Distribution and Heat Generated
Figure 20.12 Typical temperature distribution the
cutting zone. Note the steep temperature gradients
within the tool and the chip. Source: G. Vieregge.
Figure 20.14 Percentage of the heat generated in cutting
going into the workpiece, tool, and chip, as a function of
cutting speed. Note that the chip carries away most of
the heat.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-14
Temperature Distributions
Figure 20.13 Temperatures developed n turning 52100 steel: (a) flank temperature
distribution; and (b) tool-chip interface temperature distribution. Source: B. T. Chao and K.
J. Trigger.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-15
Flank and Crater Wear
(e)(d)
(a) (b) (c)
Figure 20.15 (a)
Flank and crater wear
in a cutting tool.
Tool moves to the
left. (b) View of the
rake face of a turning
tool, showing nose
radius R and crater
wear pattern on the
rake face of the tool.
(c) View of the flank
face of a turning tool,
showing the average
flank wear land VB
and the depth-of-cut
line (wear notch).
See also Fig. 20.18.
(d) Crater and (e)
flank wear on a
carbide tool. Source:
J.C. Keefe, Lehigh
University.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-16
Tool Life
Figure 20.16 Effect of workpiece microstructure and hardness on tool life in
turning ductile cast iron. Note the rapid decrease in tool life as the cutting
speed increases. Tool materials have been developed that resist high
temperatures such as carbides, ceramics, and cubic boron nitride, as
described in Chapter 21.
Figure 20.17 Tool-life curves for a variety of cutting-tool materials. The negative inverse
of the slope of these curves is the exponent n
in the Taylor tool-life equations and C is the
cutting speed at T = 1 min.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-17
Tool Wear
TABLE 20.3 Range of n Values for Eq.
(20.20) for Various Tool
Materials
High-speed steels
Cast alloys
Carbides
Ceramics
0.08–0.2
0.1–0.15
0.2–0.5
0.5–0.7
TABLE 20.4 Allowable Average Wear Land (VB)
for Cutting Tools in Various Operations
Allowable wear land (mm)
Operation High-speed Steels CarbidesTurning
Face milling
End milling
Drilling
Reaming
1.5
1.5
0.3
0.4
0.15
0.4
0.4
0.3
0.4
0.15
Note: 1 mm = 0.040 in.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-18
Examples of Wear and Tool Failures
Figure 20.18 (a) Schematic illustrations of
types of wear observed on various types of
cutting tools. (b) Schematic illustrations of
catastrophic tool failures. A study of the
types and mechanisms of tool wear and
failure is essential to the development of
better tool materials.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-19
Crater Wear
Figure 20.19 Relationship between crater-
wear rate and average tool-chip interface
temperature: (a) High-speed steel; (b) C-1
carbide; and (c) C-5 carbide. Note how rapidly
crater-wear rate increases as the temperature
increases. Source: B. T. Chao and K. J.
Trigger.
Figure 20.20 Cutting tool (right) and chip (left)
interface in cutting plain-carbon steel. The
discoloration of the tool indicates the presence of
high temperatures. Compare this figure with Fig.
20.12. Source: P. K. Wright.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-20
Surfaces Produced by Cutting
Figure 20.21 Surfaces produced on steel by cutting, as observed with a scanning electron
microscope: (a) turned surface and (b) surface produced by shaping. Source: J. T. Black and S.
Ramalingam.
(b)
(a)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 20-21
Dull Tool in Orthogonal Cutting and Feed Marks
Figure 20.22 Schematic illustration of a dull tool in
orthogonal cutting (exaggerated). Note that at small
depths of cut, the positive rake angle can effectively
become negative, and the tool may simply ride over
and burnish the workpiece surface.
Figure 20.23 Schematic illustration of feed marks in
turning (highly exaggerated). See also Fig. 20.2.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 21-1
CHAPTER 21
Cutting-Tool Materials and Cutting
Fluids

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 21-2
Cutting Tool Material Hardnesses
Figure 21.1 The hardness of various
cutting-tool materials as a function of
temperature (hot hardness). The wide
range in each group of materials is due
to the variety of tool compositions and
treatments available for that group. See
also Table 21.1 for melting or
decomposition temperatures of these
materials.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 21-3
Typical Properties of Tool Materials
Table 21.1
Carbides
Property
High-speed
steels Cast alloys WC TiC Ceramics
Cubic boron
nitride
Single-crystal
diamond
*
Hardness 83– 86 HRA 82– 84 HRA 90– 95 HRA 91– 93 HRA 91– 95 HRA 4000– 5000 HK 7000– 8000 HK
46– 62 HRC 1800– 2400 HK 1800– 3200 HK 2000– 3000 HK
Compressive strength
MPa
psi x10
3
4100– 4500
600– 650
1500– 2300
220– 335
4100– 5850
600– 850
3100– 3850
450– 560
2750– 4500
400– 650
6900
1000
6900
1000
Transverse rupture strength
MPa
psi x10
3
2400– 4800
350– 700
1380– 2050
200– 300
1050– 2600
150– 375
1380– 1900
200– 275
345– 950
50– 135
700
105
1350
200
Impact strength
J
in.- lb
1.35– 8
12– 70
0.34– 1.25
3– 11
0.34– 1.35
3– 12
0.79– 1.24
7– 11
< 0.1
< 1
< 0.5
< 5
< 0.2
< 2
Modulus of elasticity
GPa
psi x10
6
200
30


520– 690
75– 100
310– 450
45– 65
310– 410
45– 60
850
125
820– 1050
120– 150
Density
kg/m
3
lb/in.
3
8600
0.31
8000– 8700
0.29– 0.31
10,000– 15,000
0.36– 0.54
5500– 5800
0.2– 0.22
4000– 4500
0.14– 0.16
3500
0.13
3500
0.13
Volume of hard phase, % 7– 15 10– 20 70– 90 – 100 95 95
Melting or decomposition
temperature
°C
°F
1300
2370


1400
2550
1400
2550
2000
3600
1300
2400
700
1300
Thermal conductivity, W/
m K
30– 50 – 42– 125 17 29 13 500– 2000
Coefficient of thermal
expansion, x10
–6
°C
12 – 4– 6.5 7.5– 9 6– 8.5 4.8 1.5– 4.8
*
The values for polycrystalline diamond are generally lower, except impact strength, which is higher.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 21-4
General Characteristics of Cutting-Tool
Materials
TABLE 21.2 General Characteristics of Cutting- Tool Materials. These Tool Materials Have a Wide Range of
Compositions and Properties; Thus Overlapping Characteristics Exist in Many Categories of Tool Materials.
Carbon and
low- to
medium- alloy
steels
High speed
steels
Cast- cobalt
alloys
Uncoated
carbides
Coated
carbides Ceramics
Polycrystalline
cubic boron
nitride Diamond
Hot hardness
Increasing
Toughness
Increasing
Impact strength
Increasing
Wear resistance
Increasing
Chipping
resistance
Increasing
Cutting speed
Increasing
Thermal-shock
resistance
Increasing
Tool material cost
Increasing
Depth of cut Light to
medium
Light to
heavy
Light to
heavy
Light to
heavy
Light to
heavy
Light to
heavy
Light to heavy Very light for
single crystal
diamond
Finish obtainable Rough Rough Rough Good Good Very good Very good Excellent
Method of
processing
Wrought Wrought,
cast, HIP
*
sintering
Cast and
HIP
sintering
Cold
pressing
and
sintering
CVD or
PVD

Cold
pressing
and
sintering
or HIP
sintering
High-pressure,
high-temperature
sintering
High-pressure,
high-temperature
sintering
Fabrication Machining
and grinding
Machining
and
grinding
Grinding Grinding Grinding Grinding and
polishing
Grinding and
polishing
Source : R. Komanduri, Kirk- Othmer Encyclopedia of Chemical Technology , (3d ed.). New York: Wiley, 1978.*
Hot- isostatic pressing.

Chemical- vapor deposition, physical- vapor deposition.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 21-5
Operating Characteristics of Cutting-Tool
Materials
TABLE 21.3
Tool materials General characteristics
Modes of tool wear or
failure LimitationsHigh-speed steels High toughness, resistance
to fracture, wide range of
roughing and finishing
cuts, good for interrupted
cuts
Flank wear, crater wear Low hot hardness, limited
hardenability, and limited
wear resistance
Uncoated carbides High hardness over a wide
range of temperatures,
toughness, wear resistance,
versatile and wide range of
applications
Flank wear, crater wear Cannot use at low speed
because of cold welding of
chips and microchipping
Coated carbides Improved wear resistance
over uncoated carbides,
better frictional and
thermal properties
Flank wear, crater wear Cannot use at low speed
because of cold welding of
chips and microchipping
Ceramics High hardness at elevated
temperatures, high abrasive
wear resistance
Depth-of-cut line notching,
microchipping, gross
fracture
Low strength, low thermo-
mechanical fatigue strength
Polycrystalline cubic
boron nitride (cBN)
High hot hardness,
toughness, cutting-edge
strength
Depth-of-cut line notching,
chipping, oxidation,
graphitization
Low strength, low
chemical stability at higher
temperature
Polycrystalline diamond Hardness and toughness,
abrasive wear resistance
Chipping, oxidation,
graphitization
Low strength, low
chemical stability at higher
temperature
Source: After R. Komanduri and other sources.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 21-6
Carbide Inserts
Figure 21.2 Typical carbide inserts
with various shapes and chip-breaker
features; round inserts are also
available (Fig. 21.4). The holes in the
inserts are standardized for
interchangeability. Source: Courtesy
of Kyocera Engineered Ceramics, Inc.,
and Manufacturing Engineering
Magazine, Society of Manufacturing
Engineers.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 21-7
Insert Attachment
Figure 21.3 Methods of attaching inserts to toolholders: (a) Clamping, and (b) Wing lockpins. (c)
Examples of inserts attached to toolholders with threadless lockpins, which are secured with side
screws. Source: Courtesy of Valenite. (d) Insert brazed on a tool shank (see Section 30.2).
(a) (b)
(c)
(d)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 21-8
Edge Strength
Figure 21.4 Relative edge
strength and tendency for
chipping and breaking of
insets with various shapes.
Strength refers to the cutting
edge shown by the included
angles. Source:
Kennametal, Inc.
Figure 21.5 Edge preparation of inserts
to improve edge strength. See also
Section 23.2. Source: Kennametal, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 21-9
Classification of Tungsten Carbides
Table 21.4 Classification of Tungsten Carbide According to Machining Applications. See also Chapters 22 and 23 for Cutting Tool
Recommendations
Characteristics of
ISO Standard ANSI
Classification
Number
Materials to be
machined
Machining
Operation
Type of carbide
Cut Carbide
K30-K40 C-1 R oughingK20 C-2 General purposeK10 C-3 Light finishingK01 C-4
Cast iron,
nonferrous metals
and nonmetallic
materials requiring
abrasion resistance
Precision
machining
Wear-resistant
grades; generally
straight WC-Co
with varying
grain sizes
Increasing Cutting
speed
Increasing Feed
rate
Increasing
hardness and wear
resistance
Increasing
strength and
binder content
P30-P50 C-5 R oughingP20 C-6 General purposeP10 C-7 Light purposeP01 C-8
Steels and steel
alloys requiring
crater and
deformation
resistance
Precision finishing
Crater-resistant
grades; various
WC-Co
compositions
with TiC and/or
TaC alloys
Increasing Cutting
speed
Increasing Feed
rate
Increasing
hardness and wear
resistance
Increasing
strength and
binder content
Note: The ISO and ANSI comparisons are approximate.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 21-10
ISO Classification of Carbide Cutting Tools
According to Use
TABLE 21.5
Symbol
Workpiece material
Color code
Designation in increasing order
of wear resistance and
decreasing order of toughness in
each category, in increments of 5
P Ferrous metals with long chips Blue P01, P05 through P50M Ferrous metals with long or short
chips; nonferrous metals
Yellow M10 through M40
K Ferrous metals with short chips;
nonferrous metals; nonmetallic
materials
Red K01, K10 through K40

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 21-11
Effect of Coating Materials
Figure 21.6 Relative time required to
machine with various cutting-tool materials,
indicating the year the tool materials were
introduced. Source: Sandvik Coromant.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 21-12
Multiphase Coatings
Figure 21.7 Multiphase coatings on a tungsten-carbide substrate. Three
alternating layers of aluminum oxide are separated by very thin layers ot
titanium nitride. Inserts with as many as thirteen layers of coatings have been
made. Coating thicknesses are typically in the range of 2 to 10 µm. Source:
Courtesy of Kennametal, Inc., and Manufacturing Engineering Magazine,
Society of Manufacturing Engineers.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 21-13
Properties for Groups of Tool Materials
Figure 21.8 Ranges of properties for
various groups of tool materials. See
also Tables 21.1 through 21.5.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 21-14
Cubic Boron Nitride
Figure 21.9 Construction of a polycrystalline cubic boron
nitride or a diamond layer on a tungsten-carbide insert.
Figure 21.10 Inserts with polycrystalline cubic
boron nitride tips (top row) and solid
polycrystalline cBN inserts (bottom row).
Source: Courtesy of Valenite.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 21-15
Approximate Cost of Selected Cutting Tools
TABLE 21.6
Tool Size (in.) Cost ($)
High-speed steel tool bits 1/4 sq.x 2 1/2 long 1–2
1/2 sq. x 4 3–7
Carbide-tipped (brazed) tools for turning 1/4 sq. 2
3/4 sq. 4
Carbide inserts, square 3/16"thick
Plain 1/2 inscribed circle 5–9
Coated 6–10
Ceramic inserts, square 1/2 inscribed circle 8–12
Cubic boron nitride inserts, square 1/2 inscribed circle 60–90
Diamond-coated inserts 1/2 inscribed circle 50–60
Diamond-tipped inserts (polycrystalline) 1/2 inscribed circle 90–100 1

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 21-16
Application of Cutting Fluids
Figure 21.11 Schematic illustration of
proper methods of applying cutting
fluids in various machining
operations: (a) turning, (b) milling, (c)
thread grinding, and (d) drilling.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-1
CHAPTER 22
Machining Processes Used to Produce
Round Shapes

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-2
Cutting Operations
Figure 22.1 Various
cutting operations that
can be performed on a
late. Not that all parts
have circular
symmetry.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-3
Components of a Lathe
Figure 22.2
Components of a
lathe. Source:
Courtesy of
Heidenreich &
Harbeck

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-4
General Characteristics of Machining
Processes
TABLE 22.1 General Characteristics of Machining Processes Described in Chapters 22 and 23
Process Characteristics Commercial tolerances(±mm)
Turning Turning and facing operations on all types of materials; uses single-point or form tools; requires skilled
labor; low production rate, but medium to high with turret lathes and automatic machines, requiring less-
skilled labor.
Fine: 0.05–0.13
Rough: 0.13
Skiving: 0.025–0.05
Boring Internal surfaces or profiles, with characteristics similar to turning ; stiffness of boring bar important to avoid
chatter.
0.025
Drilling Round holes of various sizes and depths; requires boring and reaming for improved accuracy; high
production rate; labor skill required depends on hole location and accuracy specified.
0.075
Milling Variety of shapes involving contours, flat surfaces, and slots; wide variety of tooling; versatile; low to
medium production rate; requires skilled labor.
0.13–0.25
Planing Flat surfaces and straight contour profiles on large surfaces; suitable for low-quantity production; labor skill
required depends on part shape.
0.08–0.13
Shaping Flat surfaces and straight contour profiles on relatively small workpieces; suitable for low-quantity
production; labor skill required depends on part shape.
0.05–0.13
Broaching External and internal flat surfaces, slots, and contours with good surface finish; costly tooling; high
production rate; labor skill required depends on part shape.
0.025–0.15
Sawing Straight and contour cuts on flat or structural shapes; not suitable for hard materials unless saw has carbide
teeth or is coated with diamond; low production rate; requires only low labor skill.
0.8

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-5
Schematic Illustration of a Turning Operation
Figure 22.3 (a) Schematic illustration of a turning operation showing depth of cut, d, and feed, f. Cutting
speed is the surface speed of the workpiece at the F
c,
is the cutting force, F
t is the thrust or feed force (in
the direction of feed, F
r
is the radial force that tends to push the tool away from the workpiece being
machined. Compare this figure with Fig. 20.11 for a two-dimensional cutting operation.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-6
Right-Hand
Cutting ToolFigure 22.4 (a) Designations and
symbols for a right-hand cutting tool;
solid high-speed-steel tools have a
similar designation. Right-hand means
that the tool travels from right to left as
shown in Fig. 22.1a. (continued)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-7
Right-Hand Cutting Tool (cont.)
Figure 22.4 (continued) (b) Square insert in a right-hand toolholder
for a turning operation. A wide variety of toolholders are available
for holding inserts at various angles. Source: Kennametal Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-8
General Recommendations for Turning Tool
Angles
TABLE 22.2
High-speed steel Carbide (inserts)
Material Back rake Side rake End relief Side relief
Side and
end
cutting
edge
Back
rake
Side
rake End relief Side relief
Side and
end
cutting
edgeAluminum and magnesium alloys
20 15 12 10 5 0 5 5 5 15
Copper alloys 5 10 8 8 5 0 5 5 5 15
Steels 10 12 5 5 15 –5 –5 5 5 15
Stainless steels 5 8–10 5 5 15 –5–0 –5–5 5 5 15
High-temperature
alloys
0105 515 505 545
Refractory alloys 0 20 5 5 5 0 0 5 5 15
Titanium alloys 055515 –5–5555
Cast irons 5 10 5 5 15 –5 –5 5515
Thermoplastics 0 0 20–30 15–20 10 0 0 20–30 15–20 10
Thermosets 0 0 20–30 15–20 10 0 15 5 5 15

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-9
Summary of Turning Parameters and
Formulas
TABLE 22.3
N= Rotational speed of the workpiece, rpm
f= Feed, mm/rev or in/rev
v= Feed rate, or linear speed of the tool along workpiece length, mm/min or in/min
=fN
V= Surface speed of workpiece, m/min or ft/min
=p D
o
N (for maximum speed)
=p D
avg
N (for average speed)
l=Length of cut, mm or in.
D
o
= Original diameter of workpiece, mm or in.
D
f
= Final diameter of workpiece, mm or in.
D
avg
= Average diameter of workpiece, mm or in.
= (D
o
+D
f ) /2
d= Depth of cut, mm or in.
= ( D
o
+D
f ) /2
t= Cutting time, s or min
=l/f N
MRR = mm
3
/min or in
3
/min
=p D
avg
d fN
Torque = Nm or lb ft
=( F
c
)( D
avg
/2 )
Power = kW or hp
= (Torque) (w , where w=2p radians/min
N
ote: The units given are those that are commonly used; however, appropriate units must be
used and checked in the formulas.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-10
Cutting Speeds for Various Tool Materials
Figure 22.5 The range of applicable
cutting speeds and feeds for a variety of
tool materials. Source: Valenite.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-11
General Recommendations for Turning
Operations
TABLE 22.4
General-purpose starting conditions Range for roughing and finishing
Workpiece material Cutting tool
Depth of cut
mm (in.)
Feed
mm/rev
(in./rev)
Cutting speed
m/min
(ft/min)
Depth of cut
mm
(in.)
Feed
mm/rev
(in./rev)
Cutting speed
m/min
(ft/min)Low-C and free- machining steels
Uncoated
carbide
1.5-6.3
(0.06-0.25)
0.35
(0.014)
90
(300)
0.5-7.6
(0.02-0.30)
0.15-1.1
(0.006-0.045)
60-135
(200-450)
Ceramic-coated
carbide
" " 245-275
(800-900)
" " 120-425
(400-1400)
Triple coated
carbide
" " 185-200
(600-650)
" " 90-245
(300-800)
TiN-coated
carbide
" " 105-150
(350-500)
" " 60-230
(200-750)
Al
2
O
3
ceramic " 0.25
(0.010)
395-440
(1300-1450)
" " 365-550
(1200-1800)
Cermet " 0.30
(0.012)
215-290
(700-950)
" " 105-455
(350-1800)
Medium and high-C
steels
Uncoated
carbide
1.2-4.0
(0.05-0.20)
0.30
(0.012)
75
(250)
2.5-7.6
(0.10-0.30)
0.15-0.75
(0.006-0.03)
45-120
(150-400)
Ceramic-coated
carbide
" " 185-230
(600-750)
" " 120-410
(400-1350)
Triple coated
carbide
" " 120-150
(400-500)
" " 75-215
(250-700)
TiN-coated
carbide
" " 90-200
(300-650)
" " 45-215
(150-700)
Al
2
O
3
ceramic " 0.25
(0.010)
335
(1100)
" " 245-455
(800-1500)
Cermet " 0.25
(0.010)
170-245
(550-800)
" " 105-305
(350-1000)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-12
General Recommendations for Turning
Operations (cont.)
TABLE 22.4 (continued)
General-purpose starting conditions Range for roughing and finishing
Workpiece
material Cutting tool
Depth of cut
mm (in.)
Feed
mm/rev
(in./rev)
Cutting speed
m/min
(ft/min)
Depth of cut
mm
(in.)
Feed
mm/rev
(in./rev)
Cutting speed
m/min
(ft/min)
Cast iron, gray Uncoated
carbide
1.25-6.3
(0.05-0.25)
0.32
(0.013)
90
(300)
0.4-12.7
(0.015-0.5)
0.1-0.75
(0.004-0.03)
75-185
(250-600)
Ceramic-coated carbide
" " 200
(650)
" " 120-365
(400-1200)
TiN-coated
carbide
" " 90-135
(300-450)
" " 60-215
(200-700)
Al
2
O
3 ceramic " 0.25
(0.010)
455-490
(1500-1600)
" " 365-855
(1200-2800)
SiN ceramic " 0.32
(0.013)
730
(2400)
" " 200-990
(650-3250)
Stainless steel,
austenitic
Triple coated
carbide
1.5-4.4
(0.06-0.175)
0.35
(0.014)
150
(500)
0.5-12.7
(0.02-0.5)
0.08-0.75
(0.003-0.03)
75-230
(250-750)
TiN-coated
carbide
" " 85-160
(275-525)
" " 55-200
(175-650)
Cermet " 0.30
(0.012)
185-215
(600-700)
" " 105-290
(350-950)
High-temperature
alloys, nickel base
Uncoated
carbide
2.5
(0.10)
0.15
(0.006)
25-45
(75-150)
0.25-6.3
(0.01-0.25)
0.1-0.3
(0.004-0.012)
15-30
(50-100)
Ceramic-coated
carbide
""45
(150)
""20-60
(65-200)
TiN-coated
carbide
" " 30-55
(95-175)
""20-85
(60-275)
Al
2
O
3 ceramic " " 260
(850)
" " 185-395
(600-1300)
SiN ceramic " " 215
(700)
" " 90-215
(300-700)
Polycrystalline
CBN
" " 150
(500)
" " 120-185
(400-600)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-13
General Recommendations for Turning
Operations (cont.)
TABLE 22.4 (continued)
General-purpose starting conditions Range for roughing and finishing
Workpiece
material Cutting tool
Depth of cut
mm (in.)
Feed
mm/rev
(in./rev)
Cutting speed
m/min
(ft/min)
Depth of cut
mm
(in.)
Feed
mm/rev
(in./rev)
Cutting speed
m/min
(ft/min)
Titanium alloys Uncoated
carbide
1.0-3.8
(0.04-0.15)
0.15
(0.006)
35-60
(120-200)
0.25-6.3
(0.01-0.25)
0.1-0.4
(0.004-0.015)
10-75
(30-250)
TiN-coated
carbide
""30-60
(100-200)
" " 10-100
(30-325)
Aluminum alloys,
free machining Uncoated
carbide
1.5-5.0
(0.06-0.20)
0.45
(0.018)
490
(1600)
0.25-8.8
(0.01-0.35)
0.08-0.62
(0.003-0.025)
200-670
(650-2000)
TiN-coated
carbide
" " 550
(1800)
" " 60-915
(200-3000)
Cermet " " 490
(1600)
" " 215-795
(700-2600)
Polycrystalline
diamond
" " 760
(2500)
" " 305-3050
(1000-10,000)
High silicon Polycrystalline
diamond
" " 530
(1700)
" " 365-915
(1200-3000)
Copper alloys Uncoated
carbide
1.5-5.0
(0.06-0.20)
0.25
(0.010)
260
(850)
0.4-7.51
(0.015-0.3)
0.15-0.75
(0.006-0.03)
105-535
(350-1750)
Ceramic-coated
carbide
" " 365
(1200)
" " 215-670
(700-2200)
Triple-coated
carbide
" " 215
(700)
" " 90-305
(300-1000)
TiN-coated
carbide
" " 90-275
(300-900)
" " 45-455
(150-1500)
Cermet " " 245-425
(800-1400)
" " 200-610
(650-2000)
Polycrystalline
diamond
" " 520
(1700)
" " 275-915
(900-3000)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-14
General Recommendations for Turning
Operations (cont.)
General-purpose starting conditions Range for roughing and finishing
Workpiece
material Cutting tool
Depth of cut
mm (in.)
Feed
mm/rev
(in./rev)
Cutting speed
m/min
(ft/min)
Depth of cut
mm
(in.)
Feed
mm/rev
(in./rev)
Cutting speed
m/min
(ft/min)
Tungsten alloys Uncoated
carbide
2.5
(0.10)
0.2
(0.008)
75
(250)
0.25-5.0
(0.01-0.2)
0.12-0.45
(0.005-0.018)
55-120
(175-400)
TiN-coated carbide
""85
(275)
" " 60-150
(200-500)
Thermoplastics and
thermosets
TiN-coated
carbide
1.2
(0.05)
0.12
(0.005)
170
(550)
0.12-5.0
(0.005-0.20)
0.08-0.35
(0.003-0.015)
90-230
(300-750)
Polycrystalline
diamond
" " 395
(1300)
" " 150-730
(500-2400)
Composites,
graphite reinforced
TiN-coated
carbide
1.9
(0.075)
0.2
(0.008)
200
(650)
0.12-6.3
(0.005-0.25)
0.12-1.5
(0.005-0.06)
105-290
(350-950)
Polycrystalline
diamond
" " 760
(2500)
" " 550-1310
(1800-4300)
Source: Based on data from Kennametal, Inc.
Note: Cutting speeds for high-speed steel tools are about one-half those for uncoated
carbides.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-15
General Recommendations for Cutting Fluids
for Machining
TABLE 22.5Material Type of fluid
Aluminum
Beryllium
Copper
Magnesium
Nickel
Refractory
Steels (carbon and low alloy)
Steels (stainless)
Titanium
Zinc
Zirconium
D, MO, E, MO FO, CSN
MC, E, CSN
D, E, CSN, MO FO
D, MO, MO FO
MC, E, CSN
MC, E, EP
D, MO, E, CSN, EP
D, MO, E, CSN
CSN, EP, MO
C, MC, E, CSN
D, E, CSN
Note: CSN, chemicals and synthetics; D, dry; E, emulsion; EP,
extreme pressure; FO, fatty oil; and MO, mineral oil.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-16
Typical Capacities and Maximum Workpiece
Dimensions for Machine Tools
TABLE 22.6
Machine tool Maximum dimension (m) Power (kW)
Maximum
rpm
Lathes (swing/length) Bench 0.3/1 <1 3000 Engine 3/5 70 4000 Turret 0.5/1.5 60 3000 Automatic screw 0.1/0.3 20 10,000
Boring machines (work diameter/length)
Vertical spindle 4/3 200 300
Horizontal spindle 1.5/2 70 1000
Drilling machines
Bench and column (drill diameter) 0.1 10 12,000
Radial (column to spindle distance) 3 — —
Numerical control (table travel) 4 — —
Note: Larger capacities are available for special applications.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-17
Collets
Figure 22.6 (a) and (b) Schematic illustrations of a draw-in type collet. The workpiece is
placed in the collet hole, and the conical surfaces of the collet are forced inward by pulling it
with a draw bar into the sleeve. (c) A push-out type collet. (d) Workholding of a part on a
face plate.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-18
Mandrels
Figure 22.7 Various types of mandrels to hold workpieces for turning. These mandrels are
usually mounted between centers on a lathe. Note that in (a), both the cylindrical and the end
faces of the workpiece can be machined, whereas in (b) and (c), only the cylindrical surfaces can
be machined.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-19
Swiss-Type Automatic Screw Machine
Figure 22.8 Schematic illustration of a
Swiss-type automatic screw machine.
Source: George Gorton Machine Company.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-20
Turret Lathe
Figure 22.9 Schematic
illustration of the components
of a turret lathe. Note the two
turrets: square and hexagonal
(main). Source: American
Machinist and Automated
Manufacturing.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-21
Computer Numerical Control Lathe
Figure 22.10 A computer numerical control lathe. Note the two turrets
on this machine. Source: Jones & Lamson, Textron, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-22
Examples of Turrets
(a) (b)
Figure 22.11 (a) A turret with six different tools for inside-diameter and
outside-diameter cutting and threading operations. (b) A turret with eight
different cutting tools. Source: Monarch Machine Tool Company.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-23
Examples of Parts Made on CNC Turning
Machine Tools
Figure 22.12

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-24
Examples of Machining Complex Shapes
Figure 22.13

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-25
Machining of Various Complex Shapes
TABLE 22.7 Example: Machining of Various Complex Shapes
Operation Cutting speed Depth of cut Feed Tool
(a)OD
roughing 1150 rpm
160 m/min
(525 fpm)
3 mm (0.12 in.) 0.3 mm/rev
(0.012 ipr) K10 (C3)
OD
finishing 1750
250
(820)
0.2
(0.008)
0.15
(0.0059) K10 (C3)
Lead
roughing 300
45
(148)
3
(0.12)
0.15
(0.0059) K10 (C3)
Lead
finishing 300
45
(148)
0.1
(0.004)
0.15
(0.0059)
Diamond
compact
(b)
Eccentric
roughing 200 rpm
5-11 m/min
(16-136 fpm)
1.5 mm
(0.059 in)
0.2 mm/rev
(0.008 ipr) K10 (C3)
Eccentric
finishing 200
5-11
(16-36)
0.1
(0.004)
0.05
(0.0020) K10 (C3)
(c)
Thread
roughing 800 rpm
70 m/min
(230 fpm)
1.6 mm
(0.063 in.)
0.15 mm/rev
(0.0059 ipr)
Coated
carbide
Thread
finishing 800
70
(230)
0.1
(0.004)
0.15
(0.0059) Cermet

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-26
Typical Production Rates for Various Cutting
Operations
TABLE 22.8
Operation Rate
Turning Engine lathe Very low to low
Tracer lathe Low to medium
Turret lathe Low to medium
Computer-control lathe Low to medium
Single-spindle chuckers Medium to high
Multiple-spindle chuckers High to very high
Boring Very low
Drilling Low to medium
Milling Low to medium
Planing Very low
Gear cutting Low to medium
Broaching Medium to high
Sawing Very low to low
Note: Production rates indicated are relative: Very low is about one
or more parts per hour; medium is approximately 100 parts per
hour; very high is 1000 or more parts per hour.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-27
Surface Roughnesses
Figure 22.14 The
range of surface
roughnesses
obtained in various
machining
processes. Note the
wide range within
each group,
especially in turning
and boring. See also
Fig. 26.4.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-28
Dimensional Tolerances
Figure 22.15 The range of
dimensional tolerances obtained in
various machining processes as a
function of workpiece size. Note
that there is an order of magnitude
difference between small and large
workpieces. Source: Adapted
from Manufacturing Planning and
Estimating Handbook, McGraw-
Hill, 1963.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-29
General Troubleshooting Guide for Turning
Operations
TABLE 22.9
Problem Probable causes
Tool breakage Tool material lacks toughness; improper tool angles; machine tool lacks stiffness; worn bearings and
machine components; cutting parameters too high.
Excessive tool wear Cutting parameters too high; improper tool material; ineffective cutting fluid ; improper tool angles. Rough surface finish Built-up edge on tool; feed too high; tool too sharp, chipped or worn; vibration and chatter. Dimensional variability Lack of stiffness; excessive temperature rise; tool wear. Tool chatter Lack of stiffness; workpiece not supported rigidly; excessive tool overhang.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-30
Examples
of Threads
Figure 22.16 (a) Standard
nomenclature for screw
threads. (b) Unified
National thread and
identification of threads.
(c) ISO metric thread and
identification of threads.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-31
Types of Screw Threads
Figure 22.17 Various types of screw threads.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-32
Cutting Screw Threads
Figure 22.18 (a) Cutting screw threads on a lathe with a single-point cutting tool. (b) Cutting screw threads
with a single-point tool in several passes, normally utilized for large threads. The small arrows in the figures
show the direction of feed, and the broken lines show the position of the cutting tool as time progresses. Note
that in radial cutting, the tool is fed directly into the workpiece. In flank cutting, the tool is fed into the piece
along the right face of the thread. In incremental cutting, the tool is first fed directly into the piece at the center
of the thread, then at its sides, and finally into the root. (c) A typical carbide insert and toolholder for cutting
screw threads. (d) Cutting internal screw threads with a carbide insert. (See also Figs. 21.2 and 21.3.)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-33
Threading Die
Figure 22.19 (a) Straight chasers for cutting threads on a lathe. (b) Circular chasers. (c) A
solid threading die.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-34
Boring
Figure 22.20 (a) Schematic illustration of a steel boring bar with a carbide insert. Note the passageway
in the bar for cutting fluid application. (b) Schematic illustration of a boring bar with tungsten-alloy
“inertia disks” sealed in the bar to counteract vibration and chatter during boring. This system is
effective for boring bar length-to-diameter ratios of up to 6. (c) Schematic illustration of the
components of a vertical boring mill. Source: Kennametal Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-35
Horizontal Boring Mill
Figure 22.21 Horizontal boring
mill. Source: Giddings and Lewis,
Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-36
Drills
Figure 22.2
Various types
of drills

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-37
Drill Point Geometries
Figure 22.23 (a) Standard chisel-point drill indicating various features. The function of the pair of margins is to
provide a bearing surface for the drill against walls of the hole as it penetrates into the workpiece; drills with
four margins (double-margin) are available for improved drill guidance and accuracy. Drills with chip-breaker
features are also available. (b) Crankshaft-point drill. (c) Various drill points and their manufacturers: 1. Four-
facet split point, by Komet of America. 2. SE point, by Hertel. 3. New point, by Mitsubishi Materials. 4. Hosoi
point, by OSG Tap and Die. 5. Helical point.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-38
General Recommendations for Drill Geometry
TABLE 22.10 General Recommendations for Drill Geometry for High-Speed Twist Drills
Workpiece
material
Point
angle
Lip-relief
angle
Chisel-edge
angle
Helix
angle Point
Aluminum alloys 90–118 12–15 125–135 24–48 StandardMagnesium alloys 70–118 12–15 120–135 30–45 Standard
Copper alloys 118 12–15 125–135 10–30 Standard
Steels 118 10–15 125–135 24–32 Standard
High-strength steels 118–135 7–10 125–135 24–32 Crankshaft
Stainless steels,
low strength
118 10–12 125–135 24–32 Standard
Stainless steels,
high strength
118–135 7–10 120–130 24–32 Crankshaft
High-temp. alloys 118–135 9–12 125–135 15–30 Crankshaft
Refractory alloys 118 7–10 125–135 24–32 Standard
Titanium alloys 118–135 7–10 125–135 15–32 Crankshaft
Cast irons 118 8–12 125–135 24–32 Standard
Plastics 60–90 7 120–135 29 Standard

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-39
Drilling and Reaming Operations
Figure 22.24 Various types
of drilling and reaming
operations.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-40
Gun Drilling
Figure 22.25 (a) A gun drill showing
various features. (b) Method of gun
drilling. Source: Eldorado Tool and
Manufacturing Corporation.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-41
Trepanning
Figure 22.26 (a) Trepanning tool. (b) Trepanning with a drill-mounted single cutter.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-42
Capabilities of Drilling and Boring
Operations
TABLE 22.11
Diameter Hole depth/diameter
Tool type
range
(mm) Typical MaximumTwist 0.5–150 8 50Spade 25–150 30 100
Gun 2–50 100 300
Trepanning 40–250 10 100
Boring 3–1200 5 8

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-43
General Recommendations for Speeds and
Feeds in Drilling
TABLE 22.12
Surface speed
Feed, mm/rev (in/rev)
Drill Diameter RPM
Workpiece material m/min ft/min 1.5 mm (0.060 in.) 12.5 mm (0.5 in.) 1.5 mm 12.5 mmAluminum alloys 30–120 100–400 0.025 (0.001) 0.30 (0.012) 6400–25,000 800–3000Magnesium alloys 45–120 150–400 0.025 (0.001) 0.30 (0.012) 9600–25,000 1100–3000
Copper alloys 15–60 50–200 0.025 (0.001) 0.25 (0.010) 3200–12,000 400–1500
Steels 20–30 60–100 0.025 (0.001) 0.30 (0.012) 4300–6400 500–800
Stainless steels 10–20 40–60 0.025 (0.001) 0.18 (0.007) 2100–4300 250–500
Titanium alloys 6–20 20–60 0.010 (0.0004) 0.15 (0.006) 1300–4300 150–500
Cast irons 20–60 60–200 0.025 (0.001) 0.30 (0.012) 4300–12,000 500–1500
Thermoplastics 30–60 100–200 0.025 (0.001) 0.13 (0.005) 6400–12,000 800–1500
Thermosets 20–60 60–200 0.025 (0.001) 0.10 (0.004) 4300–12,000 500–1500
Note: As hole depth increases, speeds and feeds should be reduced. Selection of speeds
and feeds also depends on the specific surface finish required.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-44
General Troubleshooting and Drill Life
TABLE 22.12 General Troubleshooting Guide for Drilling Operations
Problem Probable causes
Drill breakage Dull drill; drill seizing in hole because of chips clogging flutes; feed too high; lip
relief angle too small.
Excessive drill wear Cutting speed too high; ineffective cutting fluid; rake angle too high; drill burned
and strength lost when sharpened.
Tapered hole Drill misaligned or bent; lips not equal; web not central.
Oversize hole Same as above; machine spindle loose; chisel edge not central; side pressure on
workpiece.
Poor hole surface finish Dull drill; ineffective cutting fluid; welding of workpiece material on drill margin;
improperly ground drill; improper alignment.
Figure 22.27 The determination of drill
life by monitoring the rise in force or
torque as a function of the number of holes
drilled. This test is also used for
determining tap life.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-45
Drilling Machines
Figure 22.28 Schematic illustration of components of (a) a vertical drill press and (b) a radial drilling
machine.
(a)
(b)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-46
CNC Drilling Machine
Figure 22.29 A three-axis
computer numerical control
drilling machine. The turret
holds as much as eight different
tools, such as drills, taps, and
reamers.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-47
Reamers
Figure 22.30 (a)
Terminology for a helical
reamer. (b) Inserted-blade
adjustable reamer.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 22-48
Tapping and Taps
Figure 22.31 (a) Terminology for a tap. (b) Tapping of steel nuts in production.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-1
CHAPTER 23
Machining Processes Used to Produce
Various Shapes

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-2
Examples of Parts Produced Using the
Machining Processes in the ChapterFigure 23.1 Typical parts and shapes produced with the machining processes described in this
chapter.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-3
Examples of Milling Cutters and Operations
Figure 23.2 Some of the basic types of milling cutters and milling operations.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-4
Example of Part Produced on a CNC Milling
Machine
Figure 23.3 A typical part that can be
produced on a milling machine equipped
with computer controls. Such parts can
be made efficiently and repetitively on
computer numerical control (CNC)
machines, without the need for
refixturing or reclamping the part.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-5
Conventional and Climb Milling
Figure 23.4 (a) Schematic illustration of conventional milling and climb milling. (b) Slab milling operation,
showing depth of cut, d, feed per tooth, f, chip depth of cut, t
c
, and workpiece speed, v. (c) Schematic
illustration of cutter travel distance l
c
to reach full depth of cut.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-6
Summary of Milling Parameters and Formulas
TABLE 23.1
N = Rotational speed of the milling cutter, rpm
f= Feed, mm/tooth or in./tooth
D= Cutter diameter, mm or in.
n= Number of teeth on cutter
v= Linear speed of the workpiece or feed rate, mm/min or in./min
V= Surface speed of cutter, m/min or ft/min
=D N
f= Feed per tooth, mm/tooth or in/tooth
=v /N n
l= Length of cut, mm or in.
t= Cutting time, s or min
=( l+l
c ) v , where l
c =extent of the cutter’s first contact with workpiece
MRR = mm
3
/min or in.
3
/min
=w d v , where w is the width of cut
Torque = N-m or lb-ft
( F
c ) (D/2)
Power = kW or hp
=(Torque) (
ω
), where
ω
= 2
π
N radians/min
Note: The units given are those that are commonly used; however, appropriate units must
be used in the formulas.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-7
Face Milling
Figure 23.5 Face-milling operation showing (a)
action of an insert in face milling; (b) climb
milling; (c) conventional milling; (d) dimensions in
face milling. The width of cut, w, is not necessarily
the same as the cutter radius. Source: Ingersoll
Cutting Tool Company.
Figure 23.6 A face-milling cutter
with indexable inserts. Source:
Courtesy of Ingersoll Cutting
Tool Company.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-8
Effects of Insert Shapes
Figure 23.7 Schematic illustration of the effect of insert shape on feed marks on a face-milled surface:
(a) small corner radius, (b) corner flat on insert, and (c) wiper, consisting of a small radius followed by a
large radius which leaves smoother feed marks. Source: Kennametal Inc. (d) Feed marks due to various
insert shapes.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-9
Face-Milling Cutter
Figure 23.8 Terminology for a face-milling cutter.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-10
Effect of Lead Angle
Figure 23.9 The effect of lead angle on the undeformed chip thickness in face
milling. Note that as the lead angle increase, the chip thickness decreases, but the
length of contact (i.e., chip width) increases. The insert in (a) must be sufficiently
large to accommodate the contact length increase.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-11
Cutter and Insert Position in Face Milling
Figure 23.10 (a) Relative position
of the cutter and insert as it first
engages the workpiece in face
milling, (b) insert positions
towards the end of the cut, and (c)
examples of exit angles of insert,
showing desirable (positive or
negative angle) and undesirable
(zero angle) positions. In all
figures, the cutter spindle is
perpendicular to the page.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-12
Cutters for Different Types of Milling
Figure 23.11 Cutters for (a) straddle
milling, (b) form milling, (c) slotting,
and (d) slitting with a milling cutter.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-13
Other Milling Operations and Cutters
Figure 23.12 (a) T-slot cutting
with a milling cutter. (b) A
shell mill.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-14
Arbors
Figure 23.13 Mounting a
milling cutter on an arbor for
use on a horizontal milling
machine.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-15
Capacities and Maximum Workpiece
Dimensions for Machine Tools
TABLE 23.2 Typical Capacities and Maximum Workpiece Dimensions for
Some Machine ToolsMachine tool
Maximum dimension
m (ft)
Power
(kW)
Maximum
speed
Milling machines (table travel) Knee-and-column 1.4 (4.6) 20 4000 rpm
Bed 4.3 (14)
Numerical control 5 (16.5)
Planers (table travel) 10 (33) 100 1.7
Broaching machines (length) 2 (6.5) 0.9 MN
Gear cutting (gear diameter) 5 (16.5)
Note: Larger capacities are available for special applications.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-16
Approximate
Cost of
Selected Tools
for Machining
TABLE 23.3 Approximate Cost of Selected Tools for Machining*Tools Size (in.) Cost ($)
Drills, HSS, straight shank 1/4 1.00–2.00
1/2 3.00–6.00
Coated (TiN) 1/4 2.60–3.00
1/2 10–15
Tapered shank 1/4 2.50–7.00
1 15–45
2 80–85
3250
4950
Reamers, HSS, hand 1/4 10–15
1/2 10–15
Chucking 1/2 5–10
1 20–25
1 1/2 40–55
End mills, HSS 1/2 10–15
1 15–30
Carbide-tipped 1/2 30–35
1 45–60
Solid carbide 1/2 30–70
1180
Burs, carbide 1/2 10–20
1 50–60
Milling cutters, HSS, staggered tooth, wide 4 35–75
8 130–260
Collets (5 core) 1 10–20
*Cost depends on the particular type of material and shape of tool, its quality,
and the amount purchased.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-17
General
Recommendations
for Milling
Operations
TABLE 23.4
General-purpose starting
conditions Range of conditions
Workpiece
material Cutting tool
Feed
mm/tooth
(in./tooth)
Speed
m/min
(ft/min)
Feed
mm/tooth
(in./tooth)
Speed
m/min
(ft/min)
Low-C and free-
machining steels
Uncoated carbide,
coated carbide,
cermets
0.13–0.20
(0.005–0.008)
120–180
(400–600)
0.085–0.38
(0.003–0.015)
90–425
(300–1400)
Alloy steels
Soft Uncoated, coated,
cermets
0.10–0.18
(0.004–0.007)
90–170
(300–550)
0.08–0.30
(0.003–0.012)
60–370
(200–1200)
Hard Cermets, PCBN 0.10–0.15
(0.004–0.006)
180–210
(600–700)
0.08–0.25
(0.003–0.010)
75–460
(250–1500)
Cast iron, gray
Soft Uncoated, coated,
cermets, SiN
0.10–10.20
(0.004–0.008)
120–760
(400–2500)
0.08–0.38
(0.003–0.015)
90–1370
(300–4500)
Hard Cermets, SiN,
PCBN
0.10–0.20
(0.004–0.008)
120–210
(400–700)
0.08–0.38
(0.003–0.015)
90–460
(300–1500)
Stainless steel,
austenitic
Uncoated, coated,
cermets
0.13–0.18
(0.005–0.007)
120–370
(400–1200)
0.08–0.38
(0.003–0.015)
90–500
(300–1800)
High-temperature
alloys, nickel base
Uncoated, coated,
cermets, SiN,
PCBN
0.10–0.18
(0.004–0.007)
30–370
(100–1200)
0.08–0.38
(0.003–0.015)
30–550
(90–1800)
Titanium alloys Uncoated, coated,
cermets
0.13–0.15
(0.005–0.006)
50–60
(175–200)
0.08–0.38
(0.003–0.015)
40–140
(125–450)
Aluminum alloys
Free machining Uncoated, coated,
PCD
0.13–0.23
(0.005–0.009)
610–900
(2000–3000)
0.08–0.46
(0.003–0.018)
300–3000
(1000–10,000)
High silicon PCD 0.13
(0.005)
610
(2000)
0.08–0.38
(0.003–0–015)
370–910
(1200–3000)
Copper alloys Uncoated, coated,
PCD
0.13–0.23
(0.005–0.009)
300–760
(1000–2500)
0.08–0.46
(0.003–0.018)
90–1070
(300–3500)
Thermoplastics and
thermosets
Uncoated, coated,
PCD
0.13–0.23
(0.005–0.009)
270–460
(900–1500)
0.08–0.46
(0.003–0.018)
90–1370
(300–4500)
Source: Based on data from Kennametal Inc.
Note: Depths of cut, d , usually are in the range of 1–8 mm (0.04–0.3 in.). PCBN: polycrystalline cubic boron nitride;
PCD: polycrystalline diamond.
Note: See also Table 22.2 for range of cutting speeds within tool material groups.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-18
General Troubleshooting Guide for Milling
Operations
TABLE 23.5Problem Probable causes
Tool breakage Tool material lacks toughness; improper tool angles; cutting
parameters too high.
Tool wear excessive Cutting parameters too high; improper tool material; improper tool
angles; improper cutting fluid.
Rough surface finish Feed too high; spindle speed too low; too few teeth on cutter; tool
chipped or worn; built-up edge; vibration and chatter.
Tolerances too broad Lack of spindle stiffness; excessive temperature rise; dull tool; chips
clogging cutter.
Workpiece surface
burnished
Dull tool; depth of cut too low; radial relief angle too small.
Back striking Dull cutting tools; cutter spindle tilt; negative tool angles.
Chatter marks Insufficient stiffness of system; external vibrations; feed, depth, and
width of cut too large.
Burr formation Dull cutting edges or too much honing; incorrect angle of entry or
exit; feed and depth of cut too high; incorrect insert geometry.
Breakout Lead angle too low; incorrect cutting edge geometry; incorrect angle
of entry or exit; feed and depth of cut too high.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-19
Surface Features and Corner Defects
Figure 23.14 Surface features and corner defects in face milling operations; see also Fig. 23.7. For
troubleshooting, see Table 23.5. Source: Kennametal Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-20
Horizontal- and Vertical-Spindle Column-and-
Knee Type Milling Machines
Figure 23.15 Schematic illustration of a horizontal-
spindle column-and-knee type milling machine. Source:
G. Boothroyd.
Figure 23.16 Schematic illustration of a vertical-spindle
column-and-knee type milling machine (also called a knee
miller). Source: G. Boothroyd.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-21
Bed-Type Milling Machine
Figure 23.17 Schematic
illustration of a bed-type
milling machine. Note the
single vertical-spindle cutter
and two horizontal spindle
cutters. Source: ASM
International.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-22
Additional Milling Machines
Figure 23.18 A computer numerical control,
vertical-spindle milling machine. This
machine is one of the most versatile machine
tools. Source: Courtesy of Bridgeport
Machines Division, Textron Inc.
Figure 23.19
Schematic
illustration of a
five-axis
profile milling
machine. Note
that there are
three principal
linear and two
angular
movements of
machine
components

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-23
Examples of Parts Made on a Planer and by
Broaching
Figure 23.20 Typical parts that can be
made on a planer.
Figure 23.21 (a) Typical parts made by internal
broaching. (b) Parts made by surface broaching. Heavy
lines indicate broached surfaces. Source: General
Broach and Engineering Company.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-24
Broaches
Figure 23.22 (a) Cutting action of a broach, showing various features. (b) Terminology for a broach.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-25
Chipbreakers and a Broaching Machine
(a)
(b)
(c)
Figure 23.23 Chipbreaker features on (a) a flat broach and (b) a round broach. (c) Vertical
broaching machine. Source: Ty Miles, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-26
Internal Broach and Turn Broaching
Figure 23.24 Terminology for a pull-type internal broach
used for enlarging long holes.
Figure 23.25 Turn broaching of a crankshaft. The crankshaft
rotates while the broaches pass tangentially across the
crankshaft’s bearing surfaces. Source: Courtesy of Ingersoll
Cutting Tool Company.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-27
Broaching Internal SplinesFigure 23.26

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-28
Sawing Operations
Figure 23.27 Examples
of various sawing
operations. Source:
DoALL Company.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-29
Types of Saw Teeth
Figure 23.28 (a) Terminology for saw teeth. (b) Types of tooth set on saw teeth, staggered to
provide clearance for the saw blade to prevent binding during sawing.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-30
Saw Teeth and Burs
Figure 23.29 (a) High-speed-steel teeth welded on steel blade. (b) Carbide inserts brazed
to blade teeth.
Figure 23.30 Types of burs. Source:
The Copper Group.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-31
Spur Gear
Figure 23.31 Nomenclature for an involute spur gear.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-32
Gear Generating
Figure 23.32
(a) Producing
gear teeth on a
blank by from
cutting. (b)
Schematic
illustration of
gear generating
with a pinion-
shaped gear
cutter. (c)
Schematic
illustration of
gear generating
in a gear shaper
using a pinion-
shaped cutter.
Note that the
cutter
reciprocates
vertically. (d)
Gear generating
with rack-
shaped cutter.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-33
Gear Cutting With a Hob
Figure 23.33 Schematic
illustration of three views of gear
cutting with a hob. Source: After
E. P. DeGarmo and Society of
Manufacturing Engineers

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-34
Cutting Bevel Gears
Figure 23.34 (a) Cutting a straight bevel-gear blank with two cutters. (b) Cutting a
spiral bevel gear with a single cutter. Source: ASM International.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-35
Gear Grinding
Figure 23.25 Finishing gears by grinding: (a) form grinding with shaped grinding wheels;
(b) grinding by generating with two wheels.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 23-36
Economics of Gear Production
Figure 23.36 Gear
manufacturing cost as a
function of gear quality.
The numbers along the
vertical lines indicate
tolerances. Source:
Society of Manufacturing
Engineers.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 24-1
CHAPTER 24
Machining and Turning Centers,
Machine-Tool Structures, and Machining
Economics

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 24-2
Examples of Parts Machined on Machining
Centers
Figure 24.1 Examples of parts that can be machined on machining centers, using various processes
such as turning, facing, milling, drilling, boring, reaming, and threading. Such parts would
ordinarily require a variety of machine tools. Source: Toyoda Machinery.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 24-3
Horizontal-Spindle Machining Center
Figure 24.2 A horizontal-spindle
machining center, equipped with an
automatic tool changes. Tool
magazines can store 200 cutting
tools. Source: Courtesy of
Cincinnati Milacron, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 24-4
Five-Axis Machining Center
Figure 24.3 Schematic
illustration of a five-axis
machining center. Note that in
addition to the three linear
movements, the pallet can be
swiveled (rotated) along two axes,
allowing the machining of
complex shapes such as those
shown in Fig. 24.1. Source:
Toyoda Machinery.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 24-5
Pallets
Figure 24.4 (a) Schematic illustration of the top view of a horizontal-spindle
machining center showing the pallet pool, set-up station for a pallet, pallet carrier,
and an active pallet in operation (shown directly below the spindle of the machine).
(b) Schematic illustration of two machining centers with a common pallet pool.
Various other arrangements are possible in such systems. Source: Hitachi Seiki
Co., Ltd.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 24-6
Swing-Around Tool Changer
Figure 24.5 Swing-around tool changer on a horizontal-spindle machining
center. Source: Cincinnati Milacron, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 24-7
Touch Probes
Figure 24.6 Touch probes used in
machining centers for determining
workpiece and tool positions and
surfaces relative to the machine table or
column. (a) Touch probe determining
the X-Y (horizontal) position of a
workpiece, (b) determining the height
of a horizontal surface, (c) determining
the planar position of the surface of a
cutter (for instance, for cutter-diameter
compensation), and (d) determining the
length of a tool for tool-length offset.
Source: Hitachi Seiki Co., Ltd.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 24-8
Vertical-Spindle Machining Center
Figure 24.7 A vertical-spindle
machining center. The tool
magazine is on the left of the
machine. The control panel on
the right can be swiveled by the
operator. Source: Courtesy of
Cincinnati Milacron, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 24-9
CNC Turning Center
Figure 24.8 Schematic
illustration of a three-turret,
two-spindle computer
numerical controlled turning
center. Source: Hitachi
Seiki Co., Ltd.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 24-10
Chip-Collecting System
Figure 24.9 Schematic illustration of a
chip-collecting system in a horizontal-
spindle machining center. The chips
that fall by gravity are collected by the
two horizontal conveyors at the bottom
of the troughs. Source: Okuma
Machinery Works Ltd.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 24-11
Machining Outer Bearing Races on a
Turning Center
Figure 24.10

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 24-12
Machine-Tool Structure and Guideways
Figure 24.11 An
example of a machine-
tool structure. The box-
type, one-piece design
with internal diagonal
ribs significantly
improves the stiffness of
the machine. Source:
Okuma Machinery
Works Ltd.
Figure 24.12 Steel guideways integrally-cast on top of the cast-iron
bed of a machining center. Because
of its higher elastic modulus, the steel
provides higher stiffness than cast
iron. Source: Hitachi Seiki Co., Ltd.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 24-13
Chatter
Figure 24.13 Chatter marks (right of
center of photograph) on the surface
of a turned part. Source: General
Electric Company.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 24-14
Internal Damping of Structural MaterialsFigure 24.14 The relative damping capacity of (a) gray cast iron and (b) epoxy-
granite composite material. The vertical scale is the amplitude of vibration and the
horizontal scale is time. Source: Cincinnati Milacron, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 24-15
Joints in Machine-Tool Structures
Figure 24.15 The damping of vibrations as a function of the number of components on a
lathe. Joints dissipate energy; the greater the number of joints, the higher the damping
capacity of the machine. Source: J. Peters.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 24-16
Machining
Economics
Figure 24.16 Graphs
showing (a) cost per
piece and (b) time per
piece in machining.
Note the optimum
speeds for both cost
and time. The range
between the two is
known as the high-
efficiency machining
range.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-1
CHAPTER 25
Abrasive Machining and Finishing
Operations

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-2
Examples of Bonded Abrasives
Figure 25.1 A variety of bonded
abrasives used in abrasive machining
processes. Source: Courtesy of Norton
Company.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-3
General Characteristics of Abrasive Machining
Processes and Machines
TABLE 25.1
Process Characteristics
Maximum dimension
(m)*
Surface Flat surfaces on most materials; production rate depends on table size and
automation; labor skill depends on part; production rate is high on
vertical-spindle rotary-table type.
Reciprocating table L : 6
Rotary table D : 3
Cylindrical Round workpieces with stepped diameters; low production rate unless
automated; labor skill depends on part shape.
Workpiece D : 0.8
Roll grinders D : 1.8
Universal grinders D : 2.5
Centerless Round workpieces; high production rate; low to medium labor skill. Workpiece D : 0.8
Internal Bores in workpiece; low production rate; low to medium labor skill. Hole D : 2
Honing Bores and holes in workpiece; low production rate; low labor skill. Spindle D : 1.2
Lapping Flat surfaces; high production rate; low labor skill. Table D : 3.7
Ultrasonic
machining
Holes and cavities of various shapes, particularly in hard and brittle
nonconducting materials.

*Larger capacities are available for special applications. L=length; D=diameter.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-4
Workpiece Geometries
Figure 25.2 The types of workpieces and operations typical of grinding: (a) cylindrical surfaces,
(b) conical surfaces, (c) fillets on a shaft, (d) helical profiles, (e) concave shape, (f) cutting off or
slotting with thin wheels, and (g) internal grinding. See also the illustrations in Section 25.6.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-5
Knoop Hardness for Various Materials and
Abrasives
TABLE 25.2Common glass 350–500 Titanium nitride 2000
Flint, quartz 800–1100 Titanium carbide 1800–3200
Zirconium oxide 1000 Silicon carbide 2100–3000
Hardened steels 700–1300 Boron carbide 2800
Tungsten carbide 1800–2400 Cubic boron nitride 4000–5000
Aluminum oxide 2000–3000 Diamond 7000–8000

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-6
Grinding Wheel
Figure 25.3 Schematic
illustration of a physical model of
a grinding wheel, showing its
structure and wear and fracture
patterns.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-7
Common Grinding Wheels
Figure 25.4 Common types of
grinding wheels made with
conventional abrasives. Note that
each wheel has a specific grinding
face; grinding on other surfaces is
improper and unsafe.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-8
Superabrasive Wheel Configurations
Figure 25.5 Examples of superabrasive wheel configurations. The annular regions (rim) are
superabrasive grinding surfaces, and the wheel itself (core) is generally made of metal or
composites. The bonding materials for the superabrasives are (a), (d), and (e) resinoid, metal, or
vitrified, (b) metal, (c) vitrified, and (f) resinoid.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-9
Marking System for Aluminum-Oxide and
Silicon-Carbide Bonded Abrasives
Figure 25.6 Standard
marking system for
aluminum-oxide and
silicon-carbide bonded
abrasives.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-10
Standard Marking System for Cubic Boron
Nitride and Diamond Bonded Abrasives
Figure 25.7 Standard marking
system for cubic
boron nitride and
diamond bonded
abrasives.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-11
Grinding Chips
Figure 25.8 (a) Grinding chip being produced by a single abrasive grain. (A) chip, (B) workpiece, (C)
abrasive grain. Note the large negative rake angle of the grain. The inscribed circle is 0.065 mm (0.0025 in.)
in diameter. Source: M. E. Merchant. (b) Schematic illustration of chip formation by an abrasive grain with
a wear flat. Note the negative rake angle of the grain and the small shear angle.
(a) (b)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-12
Grinding Wheel Surface
Figure 25.9 The surface of a
grinding wheel (A46-J8V)
showing abrasive grains, wheel
porosity, wear flats on grains, and
metal chips from the workpiece
adhering to the grians. Note the
random distribution and shape of
abrasive grains. Magnification:
50X. Source: S. Kalpakjian.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-13
Surface Grinding and Plowing
Figure 25.10 Schematic illustration of the surface
grinding process, showing various process
variables. The figure depicts conventional (up)
grinding.
Figure 25.11 Chip formation and plowing of the workpiece surface by an abrasive grain. This action is similar to abrasive
wear. (See Fig. 32.6).

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-14
Approximate Specific Energy Requirements
for Surface Grinding
TABLE 25.3
Specific energy
Workpiece material Hardness W-s/mm
3
hp-min/in.
3
Aluminum 150 HB 7–27 2.5–10Cast iron (class 40) 215 HB 12–60 4.5–22
Low-carbon steel (1020) 110 HB 14–68 5–25
Titanium alloy 300 HB 16–55 6–20
Tool steel (T15) 67 HRC 18–82 6.5–30

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-15
Shaping Using Computer Control
Figure 25.12 Shaping the grinding face of
a wheel by dressing it with computer
control. Note that the diamond dressing
tool is normal to the surface at point of
contact with the wheel. Source: Okuma
Machinery Works Ltd.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-16
Speed and Feed Ranges and Grinding Wheel
Recommendations
TABLE 25.4 Typical Range of Speeds and Feeds for Abrasive Processes
Process variable
Conventional
grinding
Creep-feed
grinding Buffing Polishing
Wheel speed (m/min) 150 0–3000 1500–3000 1800–3600 1500–2400Work speed (m/min) 10–60 0.1–1 — —
Feed (mm/pass) 0.01–0.05 1–6 — —
TABLE 25.5 Typical Recommendations for Grinding
Wheels for Use with Various Materials
Material Type of grinding wheel
Aluminum
Brass
Bronze
Cast iron
Carbides
Ceramics
Copper
Nickel alloys
Nylon
Steels
Titanium
Tool steels ( > 50 HRC)
C46–K6V
C46–K6V
A54–K6V
C60–L6V, A60–M6V
C60–I9V, D150–R75B
D150–N50M
C60–J8V
B150H100V
A36–L8V
A60–M6V
A60–K8V
B120WB
Note: These recommendations vary significantly, depending on material composition, the particular grinding operation,
and grinding fluids used.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-17
Surface Grinding Operations
Figure 25.13 Schematic illustrations of various surface grinding operations. (a) Traverse grinding with
a horizontal-spindle surface grinder. (b) Plunge grinding with a horizontal-spindle surface grinder,
producing a groove in the workpiece. (c) A vertical-spindle rotary-table grinder (also known as the
Blanchard type).

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-18
Surface Grinding
Figure 25.14 Schematic illustration of a
horizontal-spindle surface grinder.
Figure 25.15 (a) Rough grinding of steel balls on
a vertical-spindle grinder; the balls are guided by a
special rotary fixture. (b) Finish grinding of balls
in a multiple-groove fixture. The balls are ground
to within 0.013 mm (0.0005 in.) of their final size.
Source: American Machinist.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-19
Cylindrical Grinding Operations
Figure 25.16 Examples of various cylindrical grinding operations. (a) Traverse grinding, (b) plunge
grinding, and (c) profile grinding. Source: Okuma Machinery Works Ltd.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-20
Plunge and Noncylindrical Grinding
Figure 25.17 Plunge grinding of a workpiece on a
cylindrical grinder with the wheel dressed to a stepped
shape. See also Fig. 25.12.
Figure 25.18 Schematic illustration of
grinding a noncylindrical part on a cylindrical
grinder with computer controls to produce the
shape. The part rotation and the distance x
between centers is varied and synchronized to
grind the particular workpiece shape.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-21
Thread and Internal GrindingFigure 25.19 Thread grinding by (a) traverse, and (b) plunge
grinding.
Figure 25.21 Schematic illustrations of internal grinding operations.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-22
Cycle Patterns in Cylindrical Grinding
Figure 25.20

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-23
Centerless Grinding
(c)
Figure 25.22 Schematic illustrations of centerless grinding
operations: (a) through feed grinding. (b) Plunge grinding.
(c) A computer numerical control cylindrical grinding
machine. Source: Courtesy of Cincinnati Milacron, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-24
Creep-Feed Grinding
(a) (b) (c)
Figure 25.23 (a) Schematic illustration of the creep-feed grinding process. Note the large wheel depth of cut,
d. (b) A shaped groove produced on a flat surface by creep-feed grinding in one pass. Groove depth is
typically on the order of a few mm. (c) An example of creep-feed grinding with a shaped wheel. This
operation can also be performed by some of the processes described in Chapter 26. Source: Courtesy of
Blohm, Inc., and Manufacturing Engineering Magazine, Society of Manufacturing Engineers.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-25
General Recommendations for Grinding Fluids
TABLE 25.6
Material Grinding fluid
Aluminum
Copper
Magnesium
Nickel
Refractory metals
Steels
Titanium
E, EP
CSN, E, MO FO
D, MO
CSN, EP
EP
CSN, E
CSN, E
D: dry; E: emulsion; EP: Extreme pressure; CSN: chemicals and synthetics;
MO: mineral oil; FO: fatty oil.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-26
Ultrasonic Machining and Coated Abrasives
Figure 25.24 (a) Schematic illustration of the ultrasonic machining process. (b) and (c) Types of parts made
by this process. Note the small size of holes produced.
Figure 25.25 Schematic illustration of the structure of a coated abrasive.
Sandpaper, developed in the 16th
century, and emery cloth are common
examples of coated abrasives.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-27
Belt Grinding
Figure 25.26 Example:
Belt Grinding of Turbine
Nozzle Vanes.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-28
Honing and Superfinishing
Figure 25.27 Schematic illustration of a honing
tool used to improve the surface finish of bored or
ground holes.
Figure 25.28 Schematic
illustrations of the
superfinishing process for
a cylindrical part. (a)
Cylindrical mircohoning,
(b) Centerless
microhoning.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-29
Lapping
Figure 25.29 (a) Schematic illustration of the lapping process. (b) Production lapping on flat
surfaces. (c) Production lapping on cylindrical surfaces.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-30
Polishing Using Magnetic Fields
Figure 25.30 Schematic illustration of polishing of balls and rollers using magnetic fields.
(a) Magnetic float polishing of ceramic balls. (b) Magnetic-field-assisted polishing of
rollers. Source: R. Komanduri, M. Doc, and M. Fox.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-31
Abrasive-Flow Machining
Figure 25.31 Schematic illustration of
abrasive flow machining to deburr a
turbine impeller. The arrows indicate
movement of the abrasive media. Note
the special fixture, which is usually
different for each part design. Source:
Extrude Hone Corp.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-32
Robotic Deburring
Figure 25.32 A deburring operation
on a robot-held die-cast part for an
outboard motor housing, using a
grinding wheel. Abrasive belts (Fig.
25.26) or flexible abrasive radial-
wheel brushes can also be used for
such operations. Source: Courtesy
of Acme Manufacturing Company
and Manufacturing Engineering
Magazine, Society of Manufacturing
Engineers.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 25-33
Economics of Grinding and Finishing
Operations
Figure 25.33 Increase in the cost of
machining and finishing a part as a
function of the surface finish required.
This is the main reason that the surface
finish specified on parts should not be any
finer than necessary for the part to function
properly.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 26-1
CHAPTER 26
Advanced Machining Processes and
Nanofabrication

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 26-2
Examples of Parts Made by Advanced
Machining Processes
Figure 26.1 Examples of parts made by advanced machining processes. These parts are made by
advanced machining processes and would be difficult or uneconomical to manufacture by conventional
processes. (a) Cutting sheet metal with a laser beam. Courtesy of Rofin-Sinar, Inc., and Manufacturing
Engineering Magazine, Society of Manufacturing Engineers. (b) Microscopic gear with a diameter on
the order of 100
µ
m, made by a special etching process. Courtesy of Wisconsin Center for Applied
Microelectronics, University of Wisconsin-Madison.
(a)
(b)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 26-3
General
Characteristics
of Advanced
Machining
Processes
TABLE 26. 1
Process Characteristics
Process parameters and
typical material removal
rate or cutting speed
Chemical machining (CM) Shallow removal (up to 12 mm) on large flat or
curved surfaces; blanking of thin sheets; low tooling
and cost; suitable for low production runs.
0.0025–0.1 mm/min.
Electrochemical machining
(ECM)
Complex shapes with deep cavities; highest rate of
material removal among nontraditional processes;
expensive tooling and equipment; high power
consumption; medium to high production quantity.
V: 5–25 dc; A: 1.5–8 A/mm
2
;
2.5–12 mm/min, depending
on current density.
Electrochemical grinding
(ECG)
Cutting off and sharpening hard materials, such as
tungsten-carbide tools; also used as a honing process;
higher removal rate than grinding.
A: 1–3 A/mm
2
; Typically 25
mm
3
/s per 1000 A.
Electrical-discharge
machining (EDM)
Shaping and cutting complex parts made of hard
materials; some surface damage may result; also used
as a grinding and cutting process; expensive tooling
and equipment.
V: 50–380; A: 0.1–500;
Typically 300 mm
3
/min.
Wire EDM Contour cutting of flat or curved surfaces; expensive
equipment.
Varies with material and
thickness.
Laser-beam machining
(LBM)
Cutting and holemaking on thin materials; heat-
affected zone; does not require a vacuum; expensive
equipment; consumes much energy.
0.50–7.5 m/min.
Electron-beam machining
(EBM)
Cutting and holemaking on thin materials; very small
holes and slots; heat-affected zone; requires a vacuum;
expensive equipment.
1–2 mm
3
/min.
Water-jet machining (WJM) Cutting all types of nonmetallic materials to 25 mm
and greater in thickness; suitable for contour cutting
of flexible materials; no thermal damage; noisy.
Varies considerably with
material.
Abrasive water-jet machining
(AWJM)
Single or multilayer cutting of metallic and
nonmetallic materials.
Up to 7.5 m/min.
Abrasive-jet machining
(AJM)
Cutting, slotting, deburring, deflashing, etching, and
cleaning of metallic and nonmetallic materials;
manually controlled; tends to round off sharp edges;
hazardous.
Varies considerably with
material.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 26-4
Chemical Milling
Figure 26.2 (a) Missile skin-panel section contoured by chemical milling to improve the stiffness-
to-weight ratio of the part. (b) Weight reduction of space launch vehicles by chemical milling
aluminum-alloy plates. These panels are chemically milled after the plates have first been formed
into shape by processes such as roll forming or stretch forming. The design of the chemically
machined rib patterns can be modified readily at minimal cost. Source: Advanced Materials and
Processes, December 1990. ASM International.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 26-5
Chemical Machining
Figure 26.3 (a) Schematic illustration of the chemical machining process. Note that no forces
or machine tools are involved in this process. (b) Stages in producing a profiled cavity by
chemical machining; note the undercut.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 26-6
Range of Surface Roughnesses and
Tolerances
Figure 26.4 Surface
roughness and
tolerances obtained
in various machining
processes. Note the
wide range within
each process (see
also Fig. 22.13).
Source: Machining
Data Handbook, 3rd
ed. Copyright
©1980. Used by
permission of
Metcut Research
Associates, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 26-7
Chemical Blanking and Electrochemical
Machining
Figure 26.6 Schematic illustration of the electrochemical-
machining process. This process is the reverse of
electroplating, described in Section 33.8.
Figure 26.5 Various parts made by chemical blanking.
Note the fine detail. Source: Courtesy of Buckbee-Mears
St. Paul.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 26-8
Examples of Parts Made by Electrochemical
Machining
Figure 26.7 Typical parts
made by electrochemical
machining. (a) Turbine
blade made of a nickel
alloy, 360 HB; note the
shape of the electrode on
the right. Source: ASM
International. (b) Thin
slots on a 4340-steel
roller-bearing cage. (c)
Integral airfoils on a
compressor disk.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 26-9
Biomedical Implant
(a)
(b)
Figure 26.8 (a) Two total knee replacement systems showing metal implants (top pieces) with an ultrahigh
molecular weight polyethylene insert (bottom pieces). (b) Cross-section of the ECM process as applied to the
metal implant. Source: Biomet, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 26-10
Electrochemical Grinding
Figure 26.9 (a) Schematic illustration of the electrochemical-grinding process. (b) Thin slot produced
on a round nickel-alloy tube by this process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 26-11
Electrical-Discharge Machining
(a)
(b)
Figure 26.10 (a) Schematic illustration of the electrical-discharge machining process. This is one
of the most widely used machining processes, particularly for die-sinking operations. (b)
Examples of cavities produced by the electrical-discharge machining process, using shaped
electrodes. Two round parts (rear) are the set of dies for extruding the aluminum piece shown in
front (see also Fig. 15.9b). Source: Courtesy of AGIE USA Ltd. (c) A spiral cavity produced by
EDM using a slowly rotating electrode, similar to a screw thread. Source: American Machinist.
(c)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 26-12
Examples of EDM
Figure 26.11 Stepped cavities produced with a square electrode by the
EDM process. The workpiece moves in the two principal horizontal
directions (x-y), and its motion is synchronized with the downward
movement of the electrode to produce these cavities. Also shown is a
round electrode capable of producing round or elliptical cavities.
Source: Courtesy of AGIE USA Ltd.
Figure 26.12 Schematic
illustration of producing an
inner cavity by EDM, using a
specially designed electrode
with a hinged tip, which is
slowly opened and rotated to
produce the large cavity.
Source: Luziesa France.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 26-13
Wire EDM
Figure 26.13 (a) Schematic
illustration of the wire
EDM process. As much as
50 hours of machining can
be performed with one reel
of wire, which is then
discarded. (b) Cutting a
thick plate with wire EDM.
(c) A computer-controlled
wire EDM machine.
Source: Courtesy of AGIE
USA Ltd.
(a)
(b) (c)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 26-14
Laser-Beam Machining
Figure 26.14 (a) Schematic illustration of the laser-beam machining process. (b) and (c) Examples
of holes produced in nonmetallic parts by LBM.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 26-15
General Applications of Lasers in Manufacturing
TABLE 26.2
Application Laser type
Cutting Metals PCO2 , CWCO2 , Nd : YAG, ruby
Plastics CWCO2
Ceramics PCO2
Drilling
Metals PCO2 , Nd : YAG, Nd : glass, ruby
Plastics Excimer
Marking
Metals PCO2 , Nd : YAG
Plastics Excimer
Ceramics Excimer
Surface treatment, metals CWCO2
Welding, metals PCO2 , CWCO2 , Nd : YAG, Nd : glass, ruby
Note: P pulsed, CW continuous wave.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 26-16
Electron-Beam Machining
Figure 26.15 Schematic illustration of the electron-beam machining
process. Unlike LBM, this process requires a vacuum, so workpiece
size is limited to the size of the vacuum chamber.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 26-17
Water-Jet Machining
Figure 26.16 (a) Schematic illustration of water-jet machining.
(b) A computer-controlled, water-jet cutting machine cutting a
granite plate. (c) Examples of various nonmetallic parts produced
by the water-jet cutting process. Source: Courtesy of Possis
Corporation.
(c)
(a) (b)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 26-18
Abrasive-Jet Machining
Figure 26.17 Schematic illustration of the abrasive-jet machining process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 26-19
Nanofabrication
(a)
(b)
Figure 26.18 (a) A scanning electron microscope view of a diamond-tipped
(triangular piece at the right) cantilever used with the atomic force microscope.
The diamond tip is attached to the end of the cantilever with an adhesive. (b)
Scratches produced on a surface by the diamond tip under different forces. Note
the extremely small size of the scratches.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 27-1
CHAPTER 27
Fusion-Welding Processes

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 27-2
General Characteristics of Fusion Welding
Processes
TABLE 27.1Joining process Operation Advantage
Skill level
required
Welding
position
Current
type Distortion
*
Cost of
equipment
Shielded metal-arc Manual Portable and
flexible
High All ac, dc 1 to 2 LowSubmerged arc Automatic High
deposition
Low to
medium
Flat and
horizontal
ac, dc 1 to 2 Medium
Gas metal-arc Semiautomatic
or automatic
Most metals Low to
high
All dc 2 to 3 Medium to
high
Gas tungsten-arc Manual or
automatic
Most metals Low to
high
All ac, dc 2 to 3 Medium
Flux-cored arc Semiautomatic
or automatic
High
deposition
Low to
high
All dc 1 to 3 Medium
Oxyfuel Manual Portable and
flexible
High All — 2 to 4 Low
Electron-beam,
Laser-beam
Semiautomatic
or automatic
Most metals Medium
to high
All — 3 to 5 High
* 1, highest; 5, lowest.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 27-3
Oxyacetylene Flames Used in Welding
Figure 27.1 Three basic types of oxyacetylene flames used in oxyfuel-gas welding and cutting
operations: (a) neutral flame; (b) oxidizing flame; (c) carburizing, or reducing, flame. The gas
mixture in (a) is basically equal volumes of oxygen and acetylene.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 27-4
Torch Used in Oxyacetylene Welding
Figure 27.2 (a) General view of and
(b) cross-section of a torch used in
oxyacetylene welding. The acetylene
valve is opened first; the gas is lit
with a spark lighter or a pilot light;
then the oxygen valve is opened and
the flame adjusted. (c) Basic
equipment used in oxyfuel-gas
welding. To ensure correct
connections, all threads on acetylene
fittings are left-handed, whereas those
for oxygen are right-handed. Oxygen
regulators are usually painted green,
acetylene regulators red.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 27-5
Pressure-Gas Welding
Figure 27.3 Schematic illustration of the pressure-gas welding process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 27-6
Shielded Metal-Arc Welding
Figure 27.4 Schematic illustration of the shielded
metal-arc welding process. About 50% of all
large-scale industrial welding operations use this
process.
Figure 27.5 Schematic illustration of the shielded metal-arc welding operations (also known as stick
welding, because the electrode is in the shape of a
stick).

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 27-7
Multiple Pass Deep Weld
Figure 27.6 A deep weld showing
the buildup sequence of individual
weld beads.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 27-8
Submerged-Arc Welding
Figure 27.7 Schematic illustration of the submerged-arc welding process and
equipment. The unfused flux is recovered and reused. Source: American Welding
Society.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 27-9
Gas Metal-Arc Welding
Figure 27.8 Schematic
illustration of the gas metal-arc
welding process, formerly
known as MIG (for metal inert
gas) welding.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 27-10
Equipment Used in Gas Metal-Arc Welding
Figure 27.9 Basic equipment
used in gas metal-arc welding
operations. Source: American
Welding Society.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 27-11
Flux-Cored Arc-Welding
Figure 27.10 Schematic illustration of the flux-cored arc-welding process. This operation
is similar to gas metal-arc welding, showing in Fig. 27.8.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 27-12
Electrogas Welding
Figure 27.11 Schematic illustration of the
electrogas welding process. Source: American
Welding Society.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 27-13
Equipment for Electroslag Welding
Figure 27.12 Equipment used for
electroslag welding operations.
Source: American Welding Society.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 27-14
Designations for Mild Steel Coated Electrodes
TABLE 27.2
The prefix “E” designates arc welding electrode.
The first two digits of four-digit numbers and the first three digits of five-digit numbers
indicate minimum tensile strength:
E60XX 60,000 psi minimum tensile strengthE70XX 70,000 psi minimum tensile strength E110XX 110,000 psi minimum tensile strength
The next-to-last digit indicates position:
EXX1X All positions
EXX2X Flat position and horizontal fillets
The last two digits together indicate the type of covering and the current to be used.
The suffix (Example: EXXXX-A1) indicates the approximate alloy in the weld deposit:
—A1 0.5% Mo
—B1 0.5% Cr, 0.5% Mo
—B2 1.25% Cr, 0.5% Mo
—B3 2.25% Cr, 1% Mo
—B4 2% Cr, 0.5% Mo
—B5 0.5% Cr, 1% Mo
—C1 2.5% Ni
—C2 3.25% Ni
—C3 1% Ni, 0.35% Mo, 0.15% Cr
—D1 and D2 0.25–0.45% Mo, 1.75% Mn
—G 0.5% min. Ni, 0.3% min. Cr, 0.2% min. Mo, 0.1%min. V,
1% min. Mn (only one element required)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 27-15
Gas Tungsten-Arc Welding
Figure 27.13 The gas tungsten-arc welding process,
formerly known as TIG (for tungsten inert gas) welding.
Figure 27.14 Equipment for gas tungsten-arc
welding operations. Source: American
Welding Society.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 27-16
Plasma-Arc Welding
Figure 27.15 Two types of plasma-arc welding processes: (a)
transferred, (b) nontransferred. Deep and narrow welds can be made
by this process at high welding speeds.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 27-17
Comparison of Laser-Beam and Tungsten-Arc
Welding
Figure 27.16
Comparison of the
size of weld beads in
(a) electron-beam or
laser-beam welding to
that in (b)
conventional
(tungsten-arc)
welding. Source:
American Welding
Society, Welding
Handbook (8th ed.),
1991.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 27-18
Example of Laser Welding
Figure 27.17 Laser welding of razor
blades.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 27-19
Flame Cutting and Drag Lines
Figure 27.18 (a) Flame cutting of steel plate with an oxyacetylene torch, and a cross-
section of the torch nozzle. (b) Cross-section of a flame-cut plate showing drag lines.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 28-1
CHAPTER 28
Solid-State Welding Processes

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 28-2
Roll Bonding
Figure 28.1 Schematic illustration of
the roll bonding, or cladding, process

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 28-3
Ultrasonic Welding
(a) (b)
Figure 28.2 (a) Components of an ultrasonic welding machine for lap welds. The lateral
vibrations of the tool tip cause plastic deformation and bonding at the interface of the
workpieces. (b) Ultrasonic seam welding using a roller. (c) An ultrasonically welded part.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 28-4
Friction Welding
Figure 28.3 (a) Sequence of operations in the friction welding process: (1) Left-hand
component is rotated at high speed. (2) Right-hand component is brought into contact under an
axial force. (3) Axial force is increased; flash begins to form. (4) Left-hand component stops
rotating; weld is completed. The flash can subsequently be removed by machining or grinding.
(b) Shape of fusion zone in friction welding, as a function of the force applied and the rotational
speed.
(a)
(b)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 28-5
Friction Stir Welding
Figure 28.4 The principle
of the friction stir welding
process. Aluminum-alloy
plates up to 75 mm (3 in.)
thick have been welded by
this process. Source: TWI,
Cambridge, U.K.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 28-6
Resistance Spot Welding
Figure 28.5 (a) Sequence
in resistance spot welding.
(b) Cross-section of a spot
weld, showing the weld
nugget and the indentation
of the electrode on the
sheet surfaces. This is one
of the most commonly
used process in sheet-
metal fabrication and in
automotive-body
assembly.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 28-7
Welding
Machine
Design
Figure 28.6 (a)
Schematic illustration
of an air-operated
rocker-arm spot-
welding machine.
Source: American
Welding Society. (b)
and (c) Electrode
designs for easy access
into components to be
welded.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 28-8
Examples of Spot Welding
(c) (a) (b)
Figure 28.7 (a) and (b) Spot-
welded cookware and muffler.
(c) An automated spot-
welding machine with a
programmable robot; the
welding tip can move in three
principal directions. Sheets as
large as 2.2 m X 0.55 m (88
in. X 22 in.) can be
accommodated in this
machine. Source: Courtesy of
Taylor-Winfield Corporation.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 28-9
Spot Welding Example
Figure 28.8 Robots equipped with spot-welding guns and operated by computer controls, in a
mass-production line for automotive bodies. Source: Courtesy of Cincinnati Milacron, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 28-10
Resistance Seam Welding
Figure 28.9 (a) Seam-
welding process in
which rotating rolls act
as electrodes. (b)
Overlapping spots in a
seam weld. (c) Roll
spot welds. (d)
Resistance-welded
gasoline tank.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 28-11
High-Frequency Butt Welding
Figure 28.10 Two methods of high-frequency butt welding of tubes.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 28-12
Resistance Projection Welding
Figure 28.11 (a) Schematic illustration
of resistance projection welding. (b) A
welded bracket. (c) and (d) Projection
welding of nuts or threaded bosses and
studs. Source: American Welding
Society. (e) Resistance-projection-
welded grills.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 28-13
Flash Welding
Figure 28.12 (a) Flash-welding process for end-to-end welding of solid rods or tubular parts. (b)
and (c) Typical parts made by flash welding. (d) Design Guidelines for flash welding.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 28-14
Stud Welding
Figure 28.13 The sequence of operations in stud welding, which is used for welding bars, threaded rods,
and various fasteners onto metal plates.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 28-15
Comparison of Conventional and Laser-Beam
Welding
Figure 28.14 The relative sizes of the
weld beads obtained by conventional
(tungsten arc) and by electron-beam or
laser-beam welding.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 28-16
Explosion Welding
Figure 28.15 Schematic
illustration of the explosion
welding process: (a) constant
interface clearance gap and
(b) angular interface clearance
gap. (c) and (d) Cross-
sections of explosion-welded
joints. (c) titanium (top piece)
on low-carbon steel (bottom).
(d) Incoloy 800 (an iron-
nickel-based alloy) on low-
carbon steel. Source:
Courtesy of E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours & Co.
(a) (b)(c) (d)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 28-17
Diffusion Bonding Applications
Figure 28.16

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 28-18
Diffusion Bonding/Superplastic Forming
Figure 28.17 The sequence of operations in the
fabrication of various structures by diffusion bonding
and then superplastic forming of (originally) flat
sheets. Sources: (a) After D. Stephen and S.J.
Swadling. (b) and (c) Rockwell International Corp.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-1
CHAPTER 29
The Metallurgy of Welding; Welding
Design and Process Selection

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-2
Fusion Weld Zone
Figure 29.1 Characteristics
of a typical fusion weld
zone in oxyfuel gas and arc
welding. See also Figs.
27.16 and 28.14.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-3
Grain Structure in Shallow and Deep Welds
(a) (b)
Figure 29.2 Grain structure in (a) a deep weld (b) a shallow weld. Note
that the grains in the solidified weld metal are perpendicular to the surface
of the base metal. In a good weld, the solidification line at the center in the
deep weld shown in (a) has grain migration, which develops uniform
strength in the weld bead.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-4
Weld Beads
Figure 29.3 (a) Weld bead (on a cold-rolled nickel strip) produced by a laser beam. (b)
Microhardness profile across the weld bead. Note the lower hardness of the weld bead
compared to the base metal. Source: IIT Research Institute.
(a)
(b)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-5
Regions in a Fusion Weld Zone
Figure 29.4 Schematic
illustration of various regions
in a fusion weld zone (and
the corresponding phase
diagram) for 0.30% carbon
steel. Source: American
Welding Society.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-6
Corrosion
Figure 29.5 Intergranular
corrosion of a 310-stainless-steel
welded tube after exposure to a
caustic solution. The weld line is
at the center of the photograph.
Scanning electron micrograph at
20 X. Source: Courtesy of B. R.
Jack, Allegheny Ludlum Steel
Corp.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-7
Incomplete Fusion
Figure 29.6 Low-quality weld beads, the result of incomplete fusion. Source: American Welding
Society.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-8
Discontinuities in Fusion Welds
Figure 29.7 Schematic illustration of various discontinuities in fusion welds. Source: American Welding
Society.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-9
Cracks in Welded Joints
Figure 29.8
Types of cracks
(in welded
joints) caused
by thermal
stresses that
develop during
solidification
and contraction
of the weld bead
and the
surrounding
structure. (a)
Crater cracks.
(b) Various
types of cracks
in butt and T
joints.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-10
Crack in a Weld Bead
Figure 29.9 Crack in a weld bead, due
to the fact that the two components were
not allowed to contract after the weld
was completed. Source: S. L. Meiley,
Packer Engineering Associates, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-11
Distortion After Welding
Figure 29.10 Distortion of parts after welding: (a) butt joints; (b) fillet welds. Distortion is caused
by differential thermal expansion and contraction of different parts of the welded assembly.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-12
Residual Stresses Developed During Welding
Figure 29.11 Residual stresses developed during welding of a butt joint. Source: American
Welding Society.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-13
Overview of Commercial Joining Processes
TABLE 29.1 Overview of Commercial Joining Processes*
Joining Process
Brazing
Material
Thick-
ness
S
M
A
W
S
A
W
G
M
A
W
F
C
A
W
G
T
A
W
P
A
W
E
S
W
E
G
W
R
W
F
W
O
F
W
D
F
W
F
R
W
E
B
W
L
B
W
T
B
F
B
I
B
R
B
D
B
I
R
B
D
F
BCarbon stee
l
S
I
M
T
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xx
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xx
x
x
x
Low-alloy steel
S
I
M
T
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xx
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xxxx
x
x
Stainless
steel
S
I
M
T
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xx
x
x
x
x
x
x
xx
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xxxx
x
x
x
Cast iron I
M
T
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Nickel and
alloys
S
I
M
T
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xxxx
x
x
x

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-14
Overview of Commercial Joining Processes
(cont.)
TABLE 29.1 (continued)
Joining Process
Brazing
Material
Thick-
ness
S
M
A
W
S
A
W
G
M
A
W
F
C
A
W
G
T
A
W
P
A
W
E
S
W
E
G
W
R
W
F
W
O
F
W
D
F
W
F
R
W
E
B
W
L
B
W
T
B
F
B
I
B
R
B
D
B
I
R
B
D
F
BSAliminum
and alloys
S
I
M
T
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xx
x
x
x
x
x
x
xx
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xxx
x
x
xx
x
x
x
x
x
Titanium
and alloys
S
I
M
T
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xx
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xxx
x
x
x
Copper and
alloys
S
I
M
T
x
x
x
x
xx
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xx
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Magnesium
and alloys
S
I
M
T
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xx
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
Refractory
alloys
S
I
M
T
x
x
xx
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xx xx
x
*This table is presented as a general survey only. In selecting processes to be used with specific alloys, the reader
should refer to other
appropriate sources of information.
Source: Courtesy of the American Welding Society.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-15
Overview of Commercial Joining Processes
(cont.)
TABLE 29.1 (continued)
Legend
Process code Thickness
SMAW—Shielded Metal-Arc Welding
SAW—Submerged Arc Welding
GMAW—Gas Metal-Arc Welding
FCAW—Flux-Cored Arc Welding
GTAW—Gas Tungsten-Arc Welding
PAW—Plasma Arc Welding
ESW—Electroslag Welding
EGW—Electrogas Welding
RW—Resistance Welding
FW—Flash Welding
OFW—Oxyfuel Gas Welding
DFW—Diffusion Welding
FRW—Friction Welding
EBW—Electron Beam Welding
LBW—Laser Beam Welding
TB—Torch Brazing
FB—Furnace Brazing
IB—Induction Brazing
RB—Resistance Brazing
DB—Dip Brazing
IRB—Infrared Brazing
DFB—Diffusion Brazing
S—Soldering
S—Sheet: up to 3 mm in.B
I—Intermediate: 3 to 6 mm A in.B
M—Medium: 6 to 19 mm A in.B
T—Thick: 19 mm A in. B and up

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-16
Destructive Techniques
Figure 29.12 Two types of specimens for tension-shear
testing of welded joints.
Figure 29.13 (a) Wrap-around bend test method.
(b) Three-point bending of welded specimens--see
also Fig. 2.11.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-17
Testing of Spot Welds
Figure 29.14 (a) Tension-
shear test for spot welds.
(b) Cross-tension test. (c)
Twist test. (d) Peel test;
see also Fig. 30.8.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-18
Welding Design Guidelines
Figure 29.15 Design guidelines for welding. Source: J. G. Bralla (ed.), Handbook of Product Design for
Manufacturing. Copyright ©1986, McGraw-Hill Publishing Company. Used with permission.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-19
Standard Identification and Symbols for WeldsFigure 29.16

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 29-20
Weld Design Selection
Figure 29.17

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-1
CHAPTER 30
Brazing, Soldering, Adhesive-Bonding,
and Mechanical-Fastening Processes

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-2
Brazing
Figure 30.1 (a) Brazing and (b) braze welding operations.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-3
Typical Filler Metals for Brazing Various
Metals and Alloys
TABLE 30.1
Base metal Filler metal
Brazing temperature,
(°C)
Aluminum and its alloys Aluminum-silicon 570 –620Magnesium alloys Magnesium-aluminum 580 –625
Copper and its alloys Copper-phosphorus 700–925
Ferrous and nonferrous (except aluminum and
magnesium)
Silver and copper alloys,
copper- phosphorus
620–1150
Iron-, nickel-, and cobalt-base alloys Gold 900–1100
Stainless steels, nickel- and cobalt-base alloys Nickel-silver 925 –1200

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-4
Furnace Brazing
Figure 30.2 An example of furnace brazing: (a) before, (b) after. Note that the filler
metal is a shaped wire.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-5
Induction Brazing
Figure 30.3 Schematic illustration of
a continuous induction-brazing setup,
for increased productivity. Source:
ASM International.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-6
Joint Designs Used in Brazing
Figure 30.4 Joint designs commonly used in brazing operations. The clearance between
the two parts being brazed is an important factor in joint strength. If the clearance is too
small, the molten braze metal will not fully penetrate the interface. If it is too large, there
will be insufficient capillary action for the molten metal to fill the interface.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-7
Brazing Design
Figure 30.5 Examples
of good and poor design
for brazing.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-8
Stenciling
Figure 30.6
(a) Screening
or stenciling
paste onto a
printed circuit
board: 1.
Schematic
illustration of
the stenciling
process; 2. A
section of a
typical stencil
pattern.
(continued)
(a)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-9
Wave
Soldering
Figure 30.6 (continued) (b)
Schematic illustration of the
wave soldering process. (c)
SEM image of wave-soldered
joint on surface-mount device.
(b)(c)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-10
Types of Solders and their Applications
TABLE 30.2
Tin-lead General purpose
Tin-zinc
Lead-silver
Cadmium-silver
Zinc-aluminum
Tin-silver
Tin-bismuth
Aluminum
Strength at higher than room temperature
Strength at high temperatures
Aluminum; corrosion resistance
Electronics
Electronics

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-11
Joint Designs
Used in
Soldering
Figure 30.7 Joint designs commonly used for soldering. Note that
examples (e), (g), (i), and (j) are mechanically joined prior to being
soldered, for improved strength. Source: American Welding Society.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-12
Typical Properties and Characteristics of
Chemically Reactive Structural Adhesives
TABLE 30.3
Epoxy Polyurethane
Modified
acrylic Cyanoacrylate Anaerobic
Impact resistance Poor Excellent Good Poor FairTension-shear
strength, MPa (10
3
psi) 15.4 (2.2) 15.4 (2.2) 25.9 (3.7) 18.9 (2.7) 17.5 (2.5)
Peel strength, N/m
(lbf/in.) < 525 (3) 14,000 (80) 5250 (30) < 525 (3) 1750 (10)
Substrates bonded Most
materials
Most
smooth,
nonporous
Most
smooth,
nonporous
Most nonporous
metals or plastics
Metals, glass,
thermosets
Service temperature
range, °C (°F)
–55 to 120
(-70 to 250)
–160 to 80
(-250 to 175)
70 to 120
(-100 to 250)
–55 to 80
(-70 to 175)
–55 to 150
(-70 to 300)
Heat cure or mixing
required Yes Yes No No No
Solvent resistance Excellent Good Good Good Excellent
Moisture resistance Excellent Fair Good Poor Good
Gap limitation, mm
(in.) None None 0.75 (0.03) 0.25 (0.01) 0.60 (0.025)
Odor Mild Mild Strong Moderate Mild
Toxicity Moderate Moderate Moderate Low Low
Flammability Low Low High Low Low
Source: Advanced Materials & Processes, July 1990, ASM International.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-13
General Properties of Adhesives
TABLE 30.4Type Comments ApplicationsAcrylic Thermoplastic; quick setting; tough bond at room
temperature; two component; good solvent chemical
and impact resistance; short work life; odorous;
ventilation required
Fiberglass and steel sandwich bonds,
tennis racquets, metal parts,
plastics.
Anaearobic Thermoset; easy to use; slow curing; bonds at room
temperature; curing occurs in absence of air, will not
cure where air contacts adherents; one component; not
good on permeable surfaces
Close fitting machine parts such as
shafts and pulleys, nuts and bolts,
bushings and pins.
Epoxy Thermoset; one or two component; tough bond;
strongest of engineering adhesives; high tensile and low
peel strengths; resists moisture and high temperature;
difficult to use
Metal, ceramic and rigid plastic parts.
Cyanoacrylate Thermoplastic; quick setting; tough bond at room
temperature; easy to use; colorless.
“Crazy glue.” ™
Hot melt Thermoplastic; quick setting; rigid or flexible bonds;
easy to apply; brittle at low temperatures; based on
ethylene vinyl acetate, polyolefins, polyamides and
polyesters
Bonds most materials. Packaging,
book binding, metal can joints.
Pressure sensitive Thermoplastic; variable strength bonds. Primer anchors
adhesive to roll tape backing material, a release agent
on the back of web permits unwinding. Made of
polyacrylate esters and various natural and synthetic
rubber
Tapes, labels, stickers.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-14
General Properties of Adhesives (cont.)
TABLE 30.4 (continued)Type Comments ApplicationsPhenolic Thermoset; oven cured, strong bond; High tensile and
low impact strength; brittle, easy to use; cures by
solvent evaporation.
Acoustical padding, brake lining and
clutch pads, abrasive grain bonding,
honeycomb structures.Silicone Thermoset; slow curing, flexible; bonds at room
temperature; high impact and peel strength; rubber like
Gaskets, sealants.
Formaldehyde:
-urea
-melamine
-phenol
-resorcinol
Thermoset; strong with wood bonds; urea is
inexpensive, available as powder or liquid and requires
a catalyst; melamine is more expensive, cures with heat,
bond is waterproof; resorcinol forms waterproof bond
at room temperature. Types can be combined
Wood joints, plywood, bonding.
Urethane Thermoset; bonds at room temperature or oven cure;
good gap filling qualities
Fiberglass body parts, rubber, fabric.
Water-base
-animal
-vegetable
-rubbers
Inexpensive, nontoxic, nonflammable. Wood, paper, fabric, leather, dry seal
envelopes.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-15
Adhesive Peeling Test
Figure 30.8 Characteristic behavior of (a) brittle and (b) tough adhesives in a peeling test. This test is
similar to the peeling of adhesive tape from a solid surface.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-16
Joint Designs in Adhesive Bonding
Figure 30.9 Various joint designs
in adhesive bonding. Note that
good designs require large contact
areas between the members to be
joined.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-17
Configurations of Adhesively Bonded Joints
Figure 30.10 Various
configurations for
adhesively bonded
joints: (a) single lap,
(b) double lap, (c)
scarf, (d) strap.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-18
Rivets
Figure 30.11 Examples of rivets: (a) solid, (b) tubular, (c) split (or bifurcated), (d) compression.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-19
Design Guidelines for Riveting
Figure 30.12 Design guidelines for riveting. (a) Exposed shank is too long; the result is buckling
instead of upsetting. (b) Rivets should be placed sufficiently far from edges to avoid stress
concentrations. (c) Joined sections should allow ample clearance for the riveting tools. (d) Section
curvature should not interfere with the riveting process. Source: J. G. Bralla.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-20
Metal Stitching and a Double-Lock Seam
Figure 30.13 Various examples of metal stitching.
Figure 30.14 Stages in forming a double-lock seam.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-21
Crimping
Figure 30.15 Two examples
of mechanical joining by
crimping.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 30-22
Spring and Snap-In Fasteners
Figure 30.16 Examples of
spring and snap-in fasteners
used to facilitate assembly.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 31-1
CHAPTER 31
Surfaces: Their Nature, Roughness, and
Measurement

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 31-2
Surface Structure of Metals
Figure 31.1 Schematic illustration of a cross-section of the surface structure of metals. The thickness of the
individual layers is dependent on processing conditions and processing environment.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 31-3
Fatigue Curve for Surface-Ground Steel
Figure 31.2 Fatigue curve for
surface-ground 4340 steel, quenched
and tempered, 51 HRC. Note the
severe reduction in fatigue strength
under abusive grinding conditions.
(See also Fig. 2.28.)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 31-4
Terminology in Describing Surface Finish
Figure 31.3 Standard
terminology and
symbols to describe
surface finish. The
quantities are given in
µ in.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 31-5
Coordinates for Surface-Roughness
Measurements
Figure 31.4 Coordinates used for surface-roughness measurement, using Eqs. (31.1) and (31.2).

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 31-6
Standard Lay Symbols for Engineering
Surfaces
Figure 31.5

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 31-7
Measuring Surface Roughness
Figure 31.6 (a) Measuring surface roughness with a stylus. The rider supports the stylus and guards against
damage. (b) Surface measuring instrument. Source: Sheffield Measurement Division of Warner & Swasey Co.
(c) Path of stylus in surface roughness measurements (broken line) compared to actual roughness profile. Note
that the profile of the stylus path is smoother than that of the actual surface. Source: D. H. Buckley
(b)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 31-8
Surface Profiles
Figure 31.7 Typical surface profiles produced by various machining and surface-finishing processes. Note
the difference between the vertical and horizontal scales. See also Fig. 32.4. Source: D. B Dallas (ed.),
Tools and Manufacturing Engineers Handbook, 3d ed. Copyright © 1976, McGraw-Hill Publishing
Company. Used with permission.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 31-9
Three-Dimensional Surface Measurement
Figure 31.8 Surface of rolled aluminum.
Figure 31.9 A highly polished silicon
surface measured in an atomic force
microscope. The surface roughness is
R
q
= 0.134 nm.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-1
CHAPTER 32
Tribology: Friction, Wear, and
Lubrication

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-2
Contact Between Two Bodies
Figure 32.1 Schematic
illustration of the interface of
two bodies in contact, showing
real areas of contact at the
asperities. In engineering
surfaces, the ratio of the apparent
to real areas of contact can be as
high as 4-5 orders of magnitude.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-3
Range of Coefficients of Friction in
Metalworking Processes
TABLE 32.1
Coefficient of friction
(
µ
)
Process Cold HotRolling 0.05–0.1 0.2–0.7Forging 0.05–0.1 0.1–0.2
Drawing 0.0 3–0.1 —
Sheet-metal forming 0.05–0.1 0.1–0.2
Machining 0.5–2 —

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-4
Ring Compression Tests
(b)
Figure 32.2 Ring compression test between flat dies. (a) Effect of lubrication on type of ring
specimen barreling. (b) Test results: (1) original specimen and (2)-(4) increasing friction.
Source: A. T. Male and M. G. Cockcroft.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-5
Friction
Coefficient from
Ring Test
Figure 32.3 Chart to determine friction
coefficient from ring
compression test.
Reduction in height
and change in internal
diameter of the ring
are measured; then µ
is read directly from
this chart. Example: If
the ring specimen is
reduced in height by
40% and its internal
diameter decreases by
10%, the coefficient of
friction is 0.10

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-6
Effect of Wear on Surface Profiles
Figure 32.4 Changes in
originally (a) wire-brushed
and (b) ground-surface
profiles after wear. Source:
E. Wild and K. J. Mack.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-7
Adhesive and Abrasive Wear
Figure 32.5 Schematic illustration of (a) two contacting asperities, (b) adhesion between two asperities, and
(c) the formation of a wear particle.
Figure 32.6 Schematic illustration of abrasive wear in sliding.
Longitudinal scratches on a surface usually indicate abrasive
wear.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-8
Types of Wear Observed in a Single Die
Figure 32.7 Types
of wear observed in
a single die used for
hot forging. Source:
T. A. Dean

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-9
Types of Lubrication
Figure 32.8 Types of
lubrication generally occurring
in metalworking operations.
Source: After W.R.D. Wilson.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-10
Rough Surface
Figure 32.9 Rough surface developed
on an aluminum compression
specimen by the presence of a high-
viscosity lubricant and high
compression speed. The coarser the
grain size, the rougher the surface.
Source: A. Mulc and S. Kalpakjian.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-1
CHAPTER 33
Surface Treatment, Coating, and
Cleaning

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-2
Surface Treatments for Various Metals
TABLE 33.1
Metal Treatment
Aluminum Chrome plate; anodic coating, phosphate; chromate
conversion coating
Beryllium Anodic coating; chromate conversion coating
Cadmium Phosphate; chromate conversion coating
Die steels Boronizing; ion nitriding; liquid nitriding
High-temperature steels Diffusion
Magnesium Anodic coating; chromate conversion coating
Mild steel Boronizing; phosphate; carburizing; liquid nitriding;
carbonitriding; cyaniding
Molybdenum Chrome plate
Nickel- and cobalt-base alloys Boronizing; diffusion
Refractory metals Boronizing
Stainless steel Vapor deposition; ion nitriding; diffusion; liquid nitriding;
nitriding
Steel Vapor deposition; chrome plate; phosphate; ion nitriding;
induction hardening; flame hardening; liquid nitriding
Titanium Chrome plate; anodic coating; ion nitriding
Tool steel Boronizing; ion nitriding; diffusion; nitriding; liquid nitriding
Zinc Vapor deposition; anodic coating; phosphate; chromate
chemical conversion coating
Source: After M. K. Gabel and D. M. Doorman in Wear Control Handbook, New York, ASME, 1980 p. 248.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-3
Roller Burnishing
Figure 33.1 Roller burnishing of the fillet of a stepped shaft to induce
compressive surface residual stresses for improved fatigue life.
Figure 33.2 Examples of roller burnishing of
(a) a conical surface and (b) a flat surface
and the burnishing tools used. Source:
Sandvik, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-4
Thermal
Spray
Operations
Figure 33.3 Schematic
illustrations of
thermal spray
operations. (a)
Thermal wire
spray. (b)
Thermal metal-
powder spray. (c)
Plasma spray.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-5
Physical Deposition
Figure 33.4 Schematic illustration
of the physical deposition process.
Source: Cutting Tool Engineering.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-6
Sputtering
Figure 33.5 Schematic illustration of
the sputtering process. Source: ASM
International

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-7
Ion-Plating Apparatus
Figure 33.6 Schematic
illustration of an ion-plating
apparatus. Source: ASM
International.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-8
Chemical Vapor Deposition
Figure 33.7 Schematic illustration of the chemical vapor deposition
process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-9
Electroplating
Figure 33.8 Schematic illustration of
the electroplating process.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-10
Electroplating Guidelines
Figure 33.9 (a) Schematic illustration of nonuniform coatings (exaggerated) in electroplated parts. (b)
Design guidelines for electroplating. Note that sharp external and internal corners should be avoided for
uniform plating thickness. Source: ASM International.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-11
Hot Dipping
Figure 33.10 Flowline for
continuous hot-dip galvanizing of
sheet steel. The welder (upper
left) is used to weld the ends of
coils to maintain continuous
material flow. Source: American
Iron and Steel Institute.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-12
Types of Ceramics and Their Properties and
Applications
TABLE 33.2Property Type of ceramic Application
Wear resistance Chromium oxide
Aluminum oxide
Aluminum titania
Pumps, turbine shafts, seals, compressor rods
for the petroleum industry; plastics extruder
barrels; extrusion dies
Thermal insulation Zirconium oxide
(yttria stabilized)
Zirconium oxide
(calcia stabilized)
Magnesium zirconate
Fan blades, compressor blades, and seals for
gas turbines; valves, pistons, and combustion
heads for automotive engines
Electrical insulation Magnesium aluminate
Aluminum oxide
Induction coils, brazing fixtures, general
electrical applications

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 7-13
Painting
Figure 33.11 Methods of paint application: (a) dip coating, (b) flow coating, and (c) electrostatic spraying.
Source: Society of Manufacturing Engineers.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 34-1
CHAPTER 34
Fabrication of Microelectronic Devices*
*By Kent M. Kalpakjian

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 34-2
Printed Circuit Boards
Figure 34.1 A collection of
printed circuit boards. Source:
Phoenix Technologies, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 34-3
Fabrication
Sequence of
and Integrated
Circuit
Figure 34.2
General fabrication
sequence for
integrated circuits.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 34-4
MOS Transistor Cross-Sections
Figure 34.3 Cross-
sectional views of the
fabrication of a MOS
transistor. Source: R. C.
Jaeger.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 34-5
Chemical Vapor Deposition
Figure 34.4 Schematic diagrams of (a) continuous, atmospheric-pressure CVD reactor and (b) low-pressure
CVD. Source: S. M. Sze.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 34-6
Silicon Dioxide Growth
Figure 34.5 Growth of
silicon dioxide, showing
consumption of silicon.
Source: S. M. Sze.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 34-7
Pattern Transfer by Lithography
Figure 34.6 Pattern transfer by lithography. Note that the mask in step three can be a positive or negative image
of the pattern. Source: After W. C. Till and J. T. Luxon.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 34-8
Etching and Ion Implantation
Figure 34.7 Etching profiles resulting from (a) isotropic wet etching and (b) anisotropic dry
etching. Source: R. C. Jaeger.
Figure 34.8 Apparatus for ion
implantation

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 34-9
pn Junction Diode
Figure 34.9 (continued)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 34-10
pn Junction Diode (cont.)
Figure 34.9

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 34-11
Two-Level Metal Interconnect
Figure 34.10 (a) Scanning electron microscope
photograph of a two-level metal interconnect. Note
the varying surface topography. Source: National
Semiconductor Corporation. (b) Schematic drawing
of a two-level metal interconnect structure. Source: R.
C. Jaeger.
(a)
(b)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 34-12
Bonding and Packaging
(a)
(b)
(c)
Figure 34.11 (a) SEM photograph of wire bonds connecting package leads (left-hand side) to die bonding
pads. (b) and (c) Detailed views of (a). Source: Courtesy of Micron Technology, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 34-13
Integrated Circuit Packages
Figure 34.12 Schematic illustrations of different IC packages: (a) dual-in-line (DIP), and (b) ceramic flat pack,
and (c) common surface mount configuration. Sources: R. C. Jaeger and A. B. Glaser; G. E. Subak-Sharpe.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-1
CHAPTER 35
Engineering Metrology and
Instrumentation

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-2
Slideway Cross-Section
Figure 35.1 Cross-section of
a machine tool slideway. The
width, depth, angles, and
other dimensions must be
produced and measured
accurately for the machine
tool to function as expected.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-3
Types of Measurement and Instruments Used
TABLE 35.1
Sensitivity
Measurement Instrument
µ
m
µ
in.
Linear Steel rule
Vernier caliper
Micrometer, with vernier
Diffraction grating
0.5 mm
25
2.5
1
1/64 in.
1000
100
40
Angle Bevel protractor, with vernier
Sine bar
5 min
Comparative length Dial indicator
Electronic gage
Gage blocks
1
0.1
0.05
40
4
2
Straightness Autocollimator
Transit
Laser beam
2.5
0.2 mm/m
2.5
100
0.002 in./ft
100
Flatness Interferometry 0.03 1
Roundness Dial indicator Circular tracing 0.03 1
Profile Radius or fillet gage
Dial indicator
Optical comparator
Coordinate measuring machines
1
125
0.25
40
5000
10
GO-NOT GO Plug gage
Ring gage
Snap gage
Microscopes Toolmaker’s
Light section
Scanning electron
Laser scan
2.5
1
0.001
0.1
100
40
0.04
5

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-4
Caliper and
Vernier
Figure 35.2 (a) A caliper gage with a vernier. (b) A vernier, reading 27.00 + 0.42 =
27.42 mm, or 1.000 + 0.050 + 0.029 = 1.079 in. We arrive at the last measurement
as follows: First note that the two lowest scales pertain to the inch units. We next
note that the 0 (zero) mark on the lower scale has passed the 1-in. mark on the upper
scale. Thus, we first record a distance of 1.000 in. Next we note that the 0 mark
has also passed the first (shorter) mark on the upper scale. Noting that the 1-in.
distance on the upper scale is divided into 20 segments, we hve passed a distance of
0.050 in. Finally note that the marks on the two scales coincide at the number 29.
Each of the 50 graduations on the lower scale indicates 0.001 in., so we also have
0.029 in. Thus the total dimension is 1.000 in. + 0.050 in. + 0.029 in. = 1.079 in.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-5
Analog and Digital Micrometers
(a)
(c)
Figure 35.3 (a) A micrometer being used to measure the diameter of round rods. Source: L. S. Starrett
Co. (b) Vernier on the sleeve and thimble of a micrometer. Upper one reads 0.200 + 0.075 + 0.010 =
0.285 in.; lower one reads 0.200 + 0.050 + 0.020 + 0.0003 = 0.2703 in. These dimensions are read in a
manner similar to that described in the caption for Fig. 35.2. (c) A digital micrometer with a range of
0-1 in. (0-25 mm) and a resolution of 0.00005 in. (0.001 mm). Note how much easier it is to read
dimensions on this instrument than on the analog micrometer shown in (a). However, such instruments
should be handled carefully. Source: Mitutoyo Corp.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-6
Angle-Measuring Instruments
Figure 35.4 (a) Schematic
illustration of a bevel
protractor for measuring
angles. (b) Vernier for angular
measurement, indicating 14°
30´.
Figure 35.5 Setup showing the use of a
sine bar for precision measurement of
workpiece angles.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-7
Dial Indicators
Figure 35.5 Setup showing the use of a sine bar for precision measuremnet of workpiece
angles.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-8
Electronic Gages
Figure 35.7 An electronic gage for measuring bore
diameters. The measuring head is equipped with three
carbide-tipped steel pins for wear resistance. The LED
display reds 29.158 mm. Courtesy of TESA SA.
Figure 35.8
An electronic
vertical
length
mesauring
instrument,
with a
sensitivity of
1
µ
m (40
µ
in.).
Courtesy of
TESA SA.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-9
Laser Scan Micrometer and Straightness
Measurement
Figure 35.9 Two types
of measurement made
with a laser scan
micrometer. Source:
Mitutoyo Corp.
Figure 35.10 Measuring
straightness with (a) a
knife-edge rule and (b) a
dial indicator attached to a
movable stand resting on a
surface plate. Source: F. T.
Farago.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-10
Interferometry
Figure 35.11 (a) Interferometry
method for measuring flatness
using an optical flat. (b)
Fringes on a flat inclined
surface. An optical flat resting
on a perfectly flat workpiece
surface will not split the light
beam, and no fringes will be
present. (c) Fringes on a
surface with two inclinations.
Note: the greater the incline, the
closer the fringes. (d) Curved
fringe patterns indicate
curvatures on the workpiece
surface. (e) Fringe pattern
indicating a scratch on the
surface.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-11
Measuring Roundness
Figure 35.12 (a) Schematic illustration of “out of roundness” (exaggerated). Measuring roundness
using (b) V-block and dial indicator, (c) part supported on centers and rotated, and (d) circular
tracing, with part being rotated on a vertical axis. Source: After F. T. Farago.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-12
Measuring Profiles
Figure 35.13 Measuring profiles with (a)
radius gages and (b) dial indicators.
Figure 35.13 Measuring profiles
with (a) radius gages and (b) dial
indicators.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-13
Horizontal-Beam Contour Projector
Figure 35.15 A bench model horizontal-beam
contour projector with a 16 in.-diameter screen with
150-W tungsten halogen illumination. Courtesy of
L. S. Starrett Company, Precision Optical Division.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-14
Coordinate Measuring Machine
Figure 35.16 (a) Schematic illustration of one type of coordinate measuring machine. (b)
Components of another type of coordinate measuring machine. These machines are available in
various sizes and levels of automation and with a variety of probes (attached to the probe
adapter), and are capable of measuring several features of a part. Source: Mitutoyo Corp.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-15
Coordinate Measuring MachineFigure 35.17 A coordinate
measuring machine. Brown &
Sharpe Manufacturing.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-16
Gages
Figure 35.18 (a) Plug
gage for holes, with
GO-NOT GO on
opposite ends. (b)
Plug gage with GO-
NOT GO on one end.
(c) Plain ring gages for
gagin round rods.
Note the difference in
knurled surfaces to
identify the two gages.
(d) Snap gage with
adjustable anvils.
Figure 35.19 Schematic
illustration of one type of
pneumatic gage.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-17
Tolerance
Control
Figure 35.20
Basic size,
deviation, and
tolerance on a
shaft, according
to the ISO
system.
Figure 35.21 Various methods of assigning tolerances on a shaft. Source:
L. E. Doyle.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-18
Tolerances
as a Function
of Size
Figure 35.22 Tolerances as a function of part size for various
manufacturing processes. Note: Because many factors are
involved, there is a broad range for tolerances.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-19
Tolerances and Surface Roughnesses
Figure 35.23 Tolerances
and surface roughness
obtained in various
manufacturing processes.
These tolerances apply to a
25-mm (1-in.) workpiece
dimension. Source: J. A.
Schey.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 35-20
Engineering Symbols
Figure 35.24 Geometric characteristic symbols to be indicated on engineering drawings of parts to be
manufactured. Source: The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 36-1
CHAPTER 36
Quality Assurance, Testing, and
Inspection

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 36-2
Deming’s 14 Points
TABLE 36.1
1. Create constancy of purpose toward improvement of product and service.
2. Adopt the new philosophy.
3. Cease dependence on mass inspection to achieve quality.
4. End the practice of awarding business on the basis of price tag.
5. Improve constantly and forever the system of production and service, to
improve quality and productivity, and thus constantly decrease cost.
6. Institute training on the job.
7. Institute leadership (as opposed to supervision).
8. Drive out fear so that everyone can work effectively.
9. Break down barriers between departments.
10.Eliminate slogans, exhortations and targets for zero defects and new levels of
productivity
11.Eliminate quotas and management by numbers, numerical goals. Substitute
leadership.
12.Remove barriers that rob the hourly worker of pride of workmanship.
13.Institute a vigorous program of education and self-improvement.
14.Put everybody in the company to work to accomplish the transformation

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 36-3
Robust Design
Figure 36.1 A simple example of robust design. (a) Location of two mounting holes on a sheet-metal
bracket, where the deviation of the top surface of the bracket from being perfectly horizontal is ±α. (b)
New location holes, whereby the deviation of the top surface of the bracket from being perfectly
horizontal is reduced to± α/2.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 36-4
Taguchi Loss Function
Figure 36.2 (a) Objective function
value distribution of color density
for television sets. (b) Taguchi loss
function, showing the average
replacement cost per unit to correct
quality problems. Source: After G.
Taguchi.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 36-5
Frequency and Normal Distribution Curves
Figure 36.3 (a) A histogram of the number of shafts measured and their respective diameters. This type of
curve is called frequency distribution. (b) A Normal distribution curve indicating areas within each range of
standard deviation. Note: the greater the range, the higher the percentage of parts that fall within it.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 36-6
Frequency Distribution Curve
Figure 36.4 Frequency distribution
curve, showing lower and upper
specification limits.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 36-7
Statistical Quality Control
Figure 36.5 Control charts used in
statistical quality control. The process
shown is in statistical control because
all points fall within the lower and upper
control limits. In this illustration sample
size is five and the number of samples is
15.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 36-8
Constants for Control Charts
TABLE 36.2
Sample size A
2
D
4
D
3
d
2
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
15
20
1.880
1.023
0.729
0.577
0.483
0.419
0.373
0.337
0.308
0.266
0.223
0.180
3.267
2.575
2.282
2.115
2.004
1.924
1.864
1.816
1.777
1.716
1.652
1.586
0
0
0
0
0
0.078
0.136
0.184
0.223
0.284
0.348
0.414
1.128
1.693
2.059
2.326
2.534
2.704
2.847
2.970
3.078
3.258
3.472
3.735

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 36-9
Control Charts
Figure 36.6 Control
charts. (a) Process
begins to become out
of control because of
such factors as tool
wear (drift). The tool
is changed and the
process is then in
statistical control. (b)
Process parameters are
not set properly; thus
all parts are around the
upper control limit
(shift in mean). (c)
Process becomes out
of control because of
factors such as a
change in the
properties of the
incoming material
(shift in mean).

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 36-10
Digital Gages with Microprocessors
Figure 36.7 Schematic
illustration showing integration
of digital gages with
microprocessor for real-time
data acquisition and SPC/SPQ
capabilities. Note the examples
on the CRT displays, such as
frequency distribution (see Fig.
36.3) and control charts (see
Fig. 36.4). Source: Mitutoyo
Corp.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 36-11
Data for Standard Deviation Calculation
TABLE 36.3Sample number x
1
x
2
x
3
x
4
x
5

x
R
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
4.46
4.45
4.38
4.42
4.42
4.44
4.39
4.45
4.44
4.42
4.40
4.43
4.48
4.44
4.45
4.45
4.41
4.41
4.46
4.43
4.44
4.47
4.42
4.53
4.43
4.44
4.42
4.43
4.30
4.37
4.46
4.39
4.42
4.49
4.44
4.39
4.46
4.41
4.38
4.47
4.43
4.40
4.35
4.35
4.41
4.40
4.47
4.50
4.49
4.49
4.438
4.428
4.410
4.446
4.430
4.424
4.430
4.440
4.414
4.436
0.06
0.08
0.13
0.18
0.04
0.06
0.08
0.09
0.19
0.12

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 36-12
Acceptance Sampling
Figure 36.8 A typical operating-
characteristics curve used in
acceptance sampling. The higher the
percentage of defective parts, the lower
the probability of acceptance by the
consumer. There are several methods
of obtaining these curves.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 36-13
Liquid-Penetrant and Magnetic-Particle
Inspection
Figure 36.9 Sequence of operations for liquid-penetrant inspection to detect the presence of cracks
and other flaws in a workpiece. Source: Metals Handbook, Desk Edition. Copyright ©1985, ASM
International, Metals Park, Ohio. Used with permission.
Figure 36.10 Schematic illustration of
magnetic-particle inspection of a part with a
defect in it. Cracks that are in a direction
parallel to the magnetic field, such as in A,
would not be detected, whereas the others
shown would. Cracks F, G, and H are the
easiest to detect. Source: Metals Handbook,
Desk Edition. Copyright ©1985, ASM
International, Metals Park, Ohio. Used with
permission.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 36-14
Radiographic Inspection
Figure 36.11 Three methods of radiographic inspection: (a) conventional radiography, (b)
digital radiography, and (c) computed tomography. Source: Courtesy of Advanced
Materials and Processes, November 1990. ASM International

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 36-15
Eddy-Current Inspection
Figure 36.12 Changes in eddy-current
flow caused by a defect in a workpiece.
Source: Metals Handbook, Desk Edition.
Copyright ©1985, ASM International,
Metals Park, Ohio. Used with
permission.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 36-16
Holography
Figure 36.13 Schematic illustration of the basic optical system used in holography
elements in radiography, for detecting flaws in workpieces. Source: Metals Handbook,
Desk Edition. Copyright ©1985, ASM International, Metals Park, Ohio. Used with
permission.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 37-1
CHAPTER 37
Human-Factors Engineering, Safety and
Product Liability

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 37-2
Barrier Guards
Figure 37.1 Barrier guards:
(a) spring-type interlock
shuts off power to machine
when guard door is opened;
(b) guard can only be
removed by removing the
plug, which then shuts off
power to machine. Source:
Triodyne, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 37-3
Presence-Sensing Devices
Figure 37.2 (a) Presence-sensing device, with light beams forming a curtain across the zone of operation.
(b) Breaking the curtain of light beams by operator’s hands sets brake on machine and disconnects clutch.
Source: Triodyne, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-1
CHAPTER 38
Automation of Manufacturing Processes

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-2
Chapter 38 Outline
Figure 38.1

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-3
Development in the History of Automation of
Manufacturing Processes
TABLE 38.1
Date Development
1500–1600 Water power for metalworking; rolling mills for coinage strips.1600–1700 Hand lathe for wood; mechanical calculator.
1700–1800 Boring, turning, and screw cutting lathe, drill press.
1800–1900 Copying lathe, turret lathe, universal milling machine; advanced mechanical calculators.
1808 Sheet-metal cards with punched holes for automatic control of weaving patterns in looms.
1863 Automatic piano player (Pianola).
1900–1920 Geared lathe; automatic screw machine; automatic bottlemaking machine.
1920 First use of the word robot.
1920–1940 Transfer machines; mass production.
1940 First electronic computing machine.
1943 First digital electronic computer.
1945 First use of the word automation.
1948 Invention of the transistor.
1952 First prototype numerical-control machine tool.
1954 Development of the symbolic language APT (Automatically Programmed Tool); adaptive control.
1957 Commercially available NC machine tools.
1959 Integrated circuits; first use of the term group technology.
1960s Industrial robots.
1965 Large-scale integrated circuits.
1968 Programmable logic controllers.
1970 First integrated manufacturing system; spot welding of automobile bodies with robots.
1970s Microprocessors; minicomputer-controlled robot; flexible manufacturing systems; group technology.
1980s Artificial intelligence; intelligent robots; smart sensors; untended manufacturing cells,
1990s Integrated manufacturing systems; intelligent and sensor-based machines; telecommunications and
global manufacturing networks; fuzzy logic devices; artificial neural networks; Internet tools.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-4
Approximate Annual Volume of Production
TABLE 38.2
Type of production Number produced Typical products
Experimental or prototype 1–10 AllPiece or small batch 10–5000 Aircraft, special machinery, dies, jewelry, orthopedic
implants, missiles.
Batch or high volume 5000–100,000 Trucks, agricultural machinery, jet engines, diesel engines;
computer components, sporting goods.
Mass production 100,000 and over Automobiles, appliances, fasteners, food and beverage
containers.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-5
Flexibility and Productivity of Manufacturing
Systems
Figure 38.2 Flexibility and productivity of various manufacturing systems. Note the overlap
between the systems; it is due to the various levels of automation and computer control that are
possible in each group. See, also, Chapter 39, for details. Source: U. Rembold, et al., Computer
Integrated Manufacturing and Engineering. Addison-Wesley, 1993.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-6
Characteristics of Production MethodsFigure 38.3 General characteristics of three types of production methods: job
shop, batch, and mass production.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-7
Transfer Mechanisms
Figure 38.4 Two
types of transfer
mechanisms: (a)
straight and (b)
circular patterns.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-8
Transfer Line
Figure 38.5 A large transfer line for producing engine blocks and cylinder heads. Source: Ford
Motor Company.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-9
Dimensioning and Numerical Control
Figure 38.6 Positions of drilled holes in a workpiece.
Three methods of measurements are shown: (a) absolute
dimensioning, referenced from one point at the lower left of
the part; (b) incremental dimensioning, made sequentially
form one hole to another; and (c) mixed dimensioning, a
combination of both methods.
Figure 38.7 Schematic illustration of the major
components of a numerical-control machine
tool.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-10
Open- and Closed-Loop Control Systems
Figure 38.8 Schematic illustration of the components of (a) an open-loop and (b) a
closed-loop control system for a numberical-control machine. DAC means “digital-to-
analog converter.”

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-11
Direct and Indirect Measurements
Figure 38.9 (a) Direct measurement of the linear displacement of a machine-tool work table. (b) and (c)
Indirect measurement methods.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-12
Tool Movement and Interpolation
Figure 38.10 Movement of
tools in numerical-control
machining. (a) Point-to-point,
in which the drill bit drills a
hole at position 1, is retracted
and moved to position 2, and
so on. (b) Continuous path by
a milling cutter. Note that the
cutter path is compensated for
by the cutter radius. This path
can also be compensated for
cutter wear.
Figure 38.11 Types
of interpolation in
numerical control:
(a) linear, (b)
continuous path
approximated by
incremental straight
lines, and (c)
circular.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-13
Point-to-Point and Contour Maching
(a)
(b)
Figure 38.12 (a) Schematic illustration of drilling, boring, and milling with various paths. (b)
Machining a sculptured surface on a 5-axis numerical control machine. Source: The Ingersoll
Milling Machine Co.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-14
Adaptive Control
Figure 38.13 Schematic
illustration of the
application of adaptive
control (AC) for a turning
operation. The system
monitors such parameters
as cutting foce, torque,
and vibrations; if they are
excessive, it modifies
process variables such as
feed and depth of cut to
bring them back to
acceptable levels.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-15
Adaptive Control in Milling
Figure 38.14 An example of adaptive control in milling. As the depth of cut or the width of cut
increases the cutting forces and the torque increase. The system senses this increase and
automatically reduces the feed to avoid excessive forces or tool breakage, in order to maintain cutting
efficiency. Source: Y. Koren.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-16
Workpiece Inspection for Adaptive Control
Figure 38.15 In-process
inspection of workpiece
diameter in a turning
operation. The system
automatically adjusts the
radial position of the cutting
tool in order to produce the
correct diameter.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-17
Self-Guided Vehicle
Figure 38.16 A self-guided vehicle (Caterpillar Model
SGC-M) carrying a machining pallet. The vehiclre is
aligned next to a stand on the floor. Instad of following a
wire or stripe path on the factory floor, this vehicle
calculates its own path and automatically corrects for any
deviations. Source: Courtesy of Caterpillar Industrial,
Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-18
Six-Axis S-10 GMF Robot
Figure 38.17 (a)
Schematic illustration
of a six-axis S-10 GMF
robot. The payload at
the wrist is 10 kg and
repeatability is ±0.2
mm (±0.008 in.). The
robot has mechanical
brakes on all itrs axes,
which are coupled
directly. (b) The work
envelope of the robot,
as viewed from the
side. Source:
GMFanuc Robotics
Corporation.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-19
End Effectors
Figure 38.18 (a) Various devices and tools attached to end effectors to perform a variety of operations. (b) A
system of compensating for misalignment during automated assembly. Source: ATI Industrial Automation.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-20
Industrial Robots
Figure 38.19 Four types of industrial robots: (a) cartesian (rectilinear), (b) cylindrical, (c) spherical
(polar), (d) articulated (revolute, jointed, or anthropomorphic).

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-21
Work Envelopes
Figure 38.20 Work
envelopes for three types of
robots. The choice
depends on the particular
application. See also Fig.
38.17.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-22
Examples of
Industrial
Robot Use
Figure 38.21 Spot
welding automobile
bodies with industrial
robots. Source: Courtesy
of Cincinnati Milacron,
Inc.
Figure 38.22 Sealing joints
of an automobile body with
an industrial robot. Source:
Courtesy of Cincinnati
Milacron, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-23
Automated Assembly Operations
Figure 38.23
Automated assembly
operations using
industrial robots and
circular and linear
transfer lines.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-24
Mechanical and Tactile Sensors
Figure 38.24 A toolholder equipped with thrust-
force and torque sensors (smart toolholder), capable
of continuously monitoring the cutting operation.
Such toolholders are necessary for adaptive control
of manufacturing operations. (See Section 38.5.)
Source: Cincinnati Milacron, Inc.
Figure 38.25 A
robot gripper with
tactile sensors. In
spite of their
capabilities,
tactile sensors are
now being used
less frequently,
because of their
high cost and
their low
durability in
industrial
applications.
Source: Courtesy
of Lord
Corporation.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-25
Machine-Vision Applications
Figure 38.26 Examples of machine-vision applications. (a) In-line inspection of parts. (b) Identification of
parts with various shapes, and inspection and rejection of defective parts. (continued)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-26
Machine-Vision Applications (cont.)
Figure 38.26 (continued) (c) Use of cameras to provide positional input to a robot relative to the workpiece.
(d) Painting parts having different shapes by means of input from a camera. The system’s memory allows the
robot to identify the particular shape to be painted and to proceed with the correct movementso f a paint spray
attached to the end effector.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-27
Flexible Fixturing
Figure 38.27 Schematic
illustration of a flexible
fixturing setup. The clamping
force is sensed by the strain
gage, and the system
automatically adjusts this
force. Source: P. K. Wright.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-28
Design-for-Assembly Analysis
Figure 38.28 Stages in the design-
for-assembly analysis. Source:
Product Design for Assembly,
1989 edition, by G. Boothroyd and
P. Dewhurst. Reproduced with
permission.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-29
Automated Assembly Transfer Systems
Figure 38.29 Transfer systems for automated assembly: (a) rotary indexing
machine, (b) in-line indexing machine. Source: G. Boothroyd.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-30
Robot Assembly Station
Figure 38.30 A
two-arm robot
assembly station.
Source: Product
Design for
Assembly, 1989
edition, by G.
Boothroyd and P.
Dewhurst.
Reproduced with
permission.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-31
Guides
Figure 38.31 Various
guides that ensure that parts
are properly oriented for
automated assembly.
Source: G. Boothroyd.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-32
Automated Assembly Parts
Figure 38.32 Redesign of parts to facilitate automated assembly. Source: G. Boothroyd.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 38-33
Design Comparison
Figure 38.33

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-1
CHAPTER 39
Computer-Integrated Manufacturing
Systems

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-2
Computer-
Integrated
Manufacturing
System
Figure 39.1 A schematic illustration of a computer-
integrated manufacturing system.
Source: U. Rembold, et al.,
Computer-Integrated
Manufacturing and Engineering.
Addison-Wesley, 1993.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-3
CAD/CAM Flow Chart
Figure 39.2 Information flow chart in CAD/CAM application.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-4
CAD Modeling
Figure 39.3 Various types of modeling for CAD.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-5
CAD Representations
Figure 39.4 (a)
Boundary
representation of
solids, showing the
enclosing surfaces of
the solid model and the
generated solid model.
(b) A solid model
represented as
compositions of solid
primitives. (c) Three
representations of the
same part by CAD.
Source: P. Ranky.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-6
Octree Representation of a Solid Object
Figure 39.5 The octree representation of a solid object. Any volume can be broken down into octants,
which are then identified as solid, void, or partially filled. Shown is two-dimensional version, or
quadtree, for representation of shapes in a plane.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-7
Routing Sheet
Figure 39.6 An example
of a simple routing sheet.
These operation sheets
may include additional
information on materials,
tooling, estimated time for
each operation, processing
parameters (such as cutting
speeds and feeds), and
other information. The
routing sheet travels with
the part from operation to
operation. The current
trend is to store all relevant
data in computers and to
affix to the part a bar code
that serves as a key into
the database of parts
information.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-8
Group Technology
Figure 39.7 Grouping parts
according to geometric similarities.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-9
Functional
and Group-
Technology
Layout
Figure 39.8 (a) Functional layout
of machine tools in a traditional
plant. Arrosw indicate the flow of
materials and parts in various
stages of completion. (b) Group-
technology (cellular) layout.
Legend: L = lathe, M = milling
machine, D = drilling machine,
G = grinding machine, A =
assembly. Source: M. P. Groover.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-10
Decision-Tree Coding
Figure 39.9 Decision-tree classification for a sheet-metal bracket. Source: G. W. Millar.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-11
Opitz Classification and Coding System
Figure 39.10
Classification
and coding
system
according to
Opitz,
consisting fo 5
digits and a
supplementary
code of 4 digits.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-12
MultiClass Classification and Coding System
Figure 39.11 Typical MultiClass code for a machined part. Source: Organization for Industrial
Research.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-13
KK-3 System for Rotational Components
Figure 39.12 The structure of a KK-3
system for rotational components.
Source
: Japan Society for the Promotion
of Machine Industry.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-14
Flexible Manufacturing Cell
Figure 39.13 Schematic view
of a flexible manufacturing
cell, showing two machine
tools, an automated part
inspection system, and a
central robot serving these
machines. Source: P. K.
Wright.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-15
Flexible Manufacturing System
Figure 39.14 A general
view of a flexible
manufacturing system,
showing several machine
tools and an automated
guided vehicle. Source:
Courtesy of Cincinnate
Milacron, Inc.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-16
Comparison of the Characteristics of Transfer
Lines and Flexible-Manufacturing SystemsTABLE 39.1
Characteristic Transfer line FMS
Types of parts made Generally few InfiniteLot size > 100 1–50
Part changing time 1/2 to 8 hr 1 min
Tool change Manual Automatic
Adaptive control Difficult Available
Inventory High Low
Production during breakdown None Partial
Efficiency 60–70% 85%
Justification for capital expenditure Simple Difficult

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-17
Local Area Network Topology
Figure 39.15 Three basic types of topology for a local area network (LAN) (a) The star topology
is suitable for situations that are not subject to frequent configuration changes. All messages pass
through a central station. Telephone systems in office buildings usually have this type of
topology. (b) In the ring topology all individual user stations are connected in a continuous ring.
The message is forwarded from one station to the next until it reaches its assigned destination.
Although the wiring is relatively simple, the failure of one station shuts down the entire network.
(c) In the bus topology all stations have independent access to the bus. This system is reliable and
is easier than the other two to service. Because its arrangement is similar to the layout of the
machines in the factory, its installation is relatively easy, and it can be reagrranged when the
machines are rearranged.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-18
ISO/OSI Communication Model
Figure 39.16 The
ISO/OSI reference
model for open
communication. Source:
U. Rembold, et al.
Computer Integrated
Manufacturing and
Engineering. Addison-
Wesley, 1993.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-19
Expert System
Figure 39.17 Basic structure of an
expert system. The knowledge base
consists of knowledge rules (general
information about the problem) and the
inference rules (the way conclusions
are reached). The results may be
communicated to the user through the
natural-language interface. Source: K.
W. Goff, Mechanical Engineering,
October 1985.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 39-20
Expert System Applied to an Industrial RobotFigure 39.18 Expert system, as applied to an industrial robot guided by machine vision.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 40-1
CHAPTER 40
Competitive Aspects of Manufacturing

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 40-2
Commercially Available Materials
TABLE 40.1
Material Available as
Aluminum
Copper and brass
Magnesium
Steels and stainless steels
Precious metals
Zinc
Plastics
Elastomers
Ceramics (alumina)
Glass
Graphite
P, F, B, T, W, S, I
P, f, B, T, W, s, I
P, B, T, w, S, I
P, B, T, W, S, I
P, F, B, t, W, I
P, F, D, W, I
P, f, B, T, w
P, b, T
p, B, T, s
P, B, T, W, s
P, B, T, W, s
Note: P, plate or sheet; F, foil; B, bar; T, tubing; W, wire; S,
structural shapes; I, ingots for casting. Lowercase letter
indicates limited availability. Most of these materials are also
available in powder form.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 40-3
Approximate Amount of Scrap Produced in
Various Manufacturing Processes
TABLE 40.2
Process
Scrap
(%) Process
Scrap
(%)
Machining 10–60 Cold or hot extrusion, forging 15Hot closed-die forging 20–25 Permanent-mold casting 10 Sheet-metal forming 10–25 Powder metallurgy 5 Rolling, ring rolling <1

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 40-4
Advanced Materials
Figure 40.1 Advanced
materials used on the Lockheed
C-5A transport aircraft. (FRP:
fiber-reinforced plastic)

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 40-5
Material Changes From C-5A to C-5B Military
Cargo Aircraft
TABLE 40.3
Item C-5A Material C-5B Material Reason for change
Wing panels 7075–T6511 7175–T73511 DurabilityMain frame
Forgings 7075–F 7049–01 Stress corrosion resistance
Machined frames 7075–T6 7049–T73
Frame straps 7075–T6 plate 7050–T7651 plate
Fuselage skin 7079–T6 7475–T61 Material availability
Fuselage underfloor end
fittings
7075–T6 forging 7049– T73 forging Stress corrosion resistance
Wing/pylon attach fitting 4340 alloy steel PH13–8Mo Corrosion prevention
Aft ramp lock hooks D6–AC PH13–8Mo Corrosion prevention
Hydraulic lines AM350 stainless steel 21–6–9 stainless steel Improved field repair
Fuselage failsafe straps 6AI–4V titanium 7475–T61 aluminum Titanium strap debond

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 40-6
Methods of Making a Simple Part
Figure 40.2 Various methods of making a simple part: (a) casting or powder metallurgy,
(b) forging or upsetting, (c) extrusion, (d) machining, (e) joining two pieces.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 40-7
Manufacturing Process Capabilities
Figure 40.3
Manufacturing
process capabilities
for minimum part
dimensions. Source:
J. A. Schey,
Introduction to
Manufacturing
Processes (2d ed.).
McGraw-Hill, 1987.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 40-8
Dimensional Tolerance
Figure 40.4
Dimensional tolerance
capabilities of various
manufacturing
processes.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 40-9
Dimensional Tolerance and Surface Finish
Figure 40.5 Relationship between relative manufacturing
cost and dimensional tolerance.
Figure 40.6 Relative production time, as a function of surface finish produced by various manufacturing processes. Source:
American Machinist. See also Fig. 25.33.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 40-10
Manufacturing a Sheet Metal Part
Figure 40.7 Two methods of making a dish-shaped sheet-metal part: (a)
pressworking, using a male and female die, (b) explosive forming, using one
die only.

Kalpakjian • Schmid
Manufacturing Engineering and Technology
© 2001 Prentice-Hall
Page 40-11
Approximate Ranges of Machinery Base
Prices
TABLE 40.5
Type of machinery Price range
($000)
Type of machinery Price range
($000)
Broaching 10–300 Machining center 50–1000Drilling 10–100 Mechanical press 20–250
Electrical discharge 30–150 Milling 10–250
Electromagnetic and electrohydraulic 50–150 Ring rolling 500
Fused deposition modeling 60–120
Gear shaping 100–200
Grinding Robots 20–200
Cylindrical 40–150 Roll forming 5–100
Surface 20–100 Rubber forming 50–500
Headers 100–150 Stereolithography 80–200
Injection molding 30–150 Stretch forming 400–> 1000
Boring Transfer machines 100–> 1000
Jig 50–150 Welding
Horizontal boring mill 100–400 Electron beam 200–1000
Flexible manufacturing system > 1000 Spot 10–50
Lathe 10–100 Ultrasonic 50–200
Single- and multi-spindle automatic 30–250
Vertical turret 100–400
Note: Prices vary considerably, depending on size, capacity, options, and level of automation and computer controls.